D Y NA M IC T H O U G HT

T HE LAW O F VIBR ANT

ENER G Y

W ILLIA M
W AL! ER AT ! INSO N
t f Th g ht F
M
L w f th N w Tho g ht ; N gg t
“ ” “ ” “
A u hor o ou
; orce a o e e u u e s of

N w Th g ht ; m y C lt d o th S i tifi
” “ ”
the e ou e d
or u ur e an er c en c an

O lt W k A o i t Edi t f S gg ti
ccu or s ss c a e or o
“
u es on,
”
1900
; Edit f N w Th g ht
.

“ ”
01 or o ; 0 e ou 1 901-05 0
Edito
,
“ ”
f Th S a g m r o e c no r a! , 1906 .

“
I am ttt
a by tw o v ry op p osi
ack ed e ‘
te te
n o — th e Sc ie n t ist s an d th e ! n ow
Noth inn ; bo h l au gh at m e , cal l in g m e th e Frogs Dan c in g e"s r, b ut I Mte
et t
’ ’

k now that l have d iu ove re d on e of th e gr a es Forces in Nt t ure —G n v m x . .

w t. N M

M M
1906

T HE SEG NO G RA PU B LISHING CO PANY

LO S ANG ELES, CALIFO R NIA

 o
C pyrigh t 1906
B y T h e Segn og ram Publish ing C omp any

No r ma — Th i s book i s p r ec e ot t d
o r t a n d im l t
by C p y igh s u a
nt l p b l i a t ion i td t t Am i C na d
,

ne ous i i ia u c n th e U ni e S a e s of e r ca, a a.
Grea t B it in F
r a ra n e G e m ny R ss a an d t r o n t ri All
c r a u i . o he c u es.
righ t re r d
, , .

s se v e .
 A FOR EWOR D
r

T H I S is a queer book It is a m a rri age of

.

the Anc i en t O cc ul t T eachin gs to the l atest a n d

most advan c ed co n ceptions of Mod ern S c ienc e
-
an odd un io n for the pa r ties the r eto a r e of
,

enti r el y di ffer e n t temp eraments The mar

.

r iage might be expected to res ul t disast r o u sl y ,

were it n ot fo r the fa c t that a co nne cting l in k

has bee n foun d that gives them a bond of com
m on inte r est .N0 two people m ay t rul y l ove
each other unl ess the y also lov e something i n
,

common th e more the y lov e in c ommon the

—
,

greate r wi ll be thei r love for ea c h othe r An d .

,

le t us t ru st that thi s will prove t ru e in thi s ma r

riage of O ccul ti sm a n d S c ie n c e,
c elebr ated i n
this boo k .

“
The O ccul tists u s u ally get at the fa c ts ,

fi rst b u t the y man age to e v olve s uc h out

,

r ageo u s theo ries to ex p l ai n the fa c ts that th e

,

world will have no n e of thei r wa r es a n d t urn s

,
“ ”
to Science for somethi n g r easo n ab le S ci .

ence proceeding alo n g di ffe r en t lin es at fir st

, ,
“ ”
de n ies these facts of the O c c ultists n ot find ,

in g them a cc o un ted for b y an y of her e xis ting

3
 A FOREWORD
“
theories ; but later on when the facts have
, ,
”

been fin ally thrust under her eyes after r e ,

“
p e a te d attempts and failures she sa y s O h , , ,
”
yes of course ! and proceeds to evolve a new
,

theory welding it with other scientific hypoth

,

eses and after attaching a new label thereto

, ,
“
she proudly exhibits the thi ng a s the latest
” —
discovery of Modern Science and smiles in
dul ge n tly or indignantly when the theo ry of
, ,
“
the old O c cultists is mentioned sa ying ! uite , ,
”
a difi e re n t thin g we assure you !
,
And yet ,

m all justice be it said Science usually pro

, ,
”
c e e ds to find much better proofs to fit the
“
facts of O cc ul tism than did the O ccultists
”
,

themselves The O ccultist sees thin g s

.
“ ”
but ,
“
is a poor hand at proofs whi le the Scie n -

“ ”
tist is g reat on proofs but s o often and so
, ,

lon g fails to see many thin g s patent to the O c

,
“ ”
cultist who is able to look within himself ,

but who is then unable to positively and scie n

“ ”
tifically prove the facts This is easily ex .

plained the O ccultist s information comes

— ’

”
from within while the Scientists comes
,
”
from without and proofs
— be long to the
“ ”
without side of Mentation An d thi s is why .

the O ccultists so often make such a b ungle r e

“ ”
garding proofs and the Scientist fails to see
“ ”
fa c ts that a r e starin g the O ccultist 111 the
fa ce .

A
 A FOR EWOR D

The who l e histo ry of O c c ultism a n d S c ien c e

p r o v es the above Take the phenomen on .

“ ”
c alled Mesmerism fo r instance it w as a n
—

ol d stor y with the O ccultists who had been for ,

y ea r s aware of it theoreti c all y and practicall y

,
.

Mesmer brought it into gene r al prominen c e ,

’
and Science laughed at it and at Mesmer s
“ ”
fluid theory and c alled him a charlatan
,

and imposter Y ea r s afterwa r ds B r aid an

.
, ,

English surgeon dis c overed that some of

,
“ ”
the facts of Mesmerism were t r ue and ,

he anno un ced hi s discove ry i n a scie n tific

manner and 10 ! hi s views we re accepted a n d
, ,
“ ”
the thing was called Hypnotism poor ol d ,

Mesmer being forgotten , because of his theo ry .

Then after a numbe r of y ea r s certain other

, ,

aspects of the pheno m en on we r e dis c overed ,

“ ”
and scientifically relabelled S ugge stio n and ,
“ ”
the re naming was supposed to explai n the
-

entire subject the lea rned ones n ow sayi ng

‘
, ,
“ ’ ’
P ooh tis nothi ng but Suggestion as if that
, ,

ex plain ed the matte r But s o far the y have.

,

onl y accepted certai n phases of thi s form of

Dyn ami c Though t — fo r that is what it is and ,

the r e a r e many other phases of which the y do

n ot d r eam .

An d the same is t ru e of the O c c ult Teachi n g

“
that there is Life in Everything the Un i —

”
v er se is Alive For years this idea was
.
,

5
 A FOR EW OR D

h oot e d at an d we had learned s cientific di s

,
“ ” “
co u rses upo n dead Matter inert sub ,
”
stance etc But only withi n the past decade
,
.
,

— yes within the last five yea r s has Science

, ,

discovered that there was Life i n Everythin g ,

and that even in the Atom of mineral and chem

ical substance there was to be found evidence
,

of Mind An d Science is beginning to pl ume

.

“ ”
itself on its r ecent discovery and to a c co un t ,
“
for it by a new theory whi ch is quite a dif ,
”
fe re nt thing we assu r e you ,
from the ol d ,

O cc ult Theory .

An d the same will prove true i n the case of

the O ccult Teaching of an Universal Mind or ,

Cosmi c Mind Science and Philosophy have

.

l ong laughed at this but even now their fore ,

most investigators have come to the borders of

a new c ountry and are gasping in amazement ,

at what they see beyond its borders— they are

“
now talking about Life and Mind in the
” —
Ether and befo re long the y will dis c ard
their paradoxical absurd hypothetical Ethe r , , ,

a n d say We are bathed in an O c ean of Mind

“
,
”

—only they will insist that t hi s “ O cean of

” “
Min d is somehow a secretion of Matte r
, ,

something oozing out from the pores of Matter ,

perhaps .

But Science is doing valuable work in the di

r e c tion of investigation and experiment an d i n ,

6
 A FOR EWOR D

this wa y is p rov ing the p rincip al occul t te ach

ing s in a wa y impossible to th e O c c ultists
themselves .

So you see that both O cc ul ti sm a n d S c i enc e

,

have their own work to do and neithe r can do

—

the work of the other Just n ow Scie n ce is .

“
coquetting with the q uestio n of Thought
”
T ransmission etc at whi ch she has for so
, .
,

long sneered a n d laughed B y and by she will .

accept the facts and the n proceed to prove

,

them b y a se ries of careful and conclusive ex

M
p e r im e n t s and
,
will then annou nc e the result ,
“
s olemnly as
,
a tri p h of Science .

An d so in thi s book y o u will find a ma rriage

,

of the ol d O c c ult Teachi n gs and Modern Scie n

tific Resea r ches and Investigation And th e .

two a r e bo un d togethe r with that bo n d forged

b y the w rite r of the book heated i n th e ove n
—

of his min d and hammered into shape wi th his

,
“ ”
unt r ained tho ught a c rude clumsy thi ng
—
, ,
“
but it se rves its p urpose a thing called The
—

The ory of Dyn am ic Thoug ht .

An d so this is what this Theo ry is a tie

,
—

that binds How y o u wi l l l i ke it depen ds

.

u pon yo ur se lf For himself the writer does

.
,

n ot hesitate to sa y that he is pleased with his

ha n diwo rk rude and cl ums y tho ugh it ma y b e

, ,
.

He beli e ves that he has made a thing that will

sta nd w e a r and tear, and that though it be not
 A FOR EW OR D

“
beautiful ly fin ished it will serve
, ,
and be
”
useful . And that is the main thin g after all
,
.

And the n perhaps some may see beauty in the

, , ,

very c rudeness of the thin g ma y see that it

—

bears the loving mark of the hamme r that beat

it into shape— may recognize that over it has
passed the caress of the hand that made it
and in that seeing there may come the r e cogn i

M
“
tion of a beauty that is beyond prettiness .

W ILLIA W AL! ER ATKI N S O N .

Los Ang e l e s, Calif or nia,

Fe bruary 1 6, 1 906 .
 C ONT ENT S
CHAPTER .

“
I . In the B eginn ing

M
I I Thin gs
. as They Are

M
III . The Un iv e rs al ity of Life an d in d

IV . Life an d in d Am o n g the Ato m s

V . The Sto ry of Substan c e
VI . Substan ce an d B eyo n d
V II . The Parado x of Sc ien c e
VII I . The Fo rc e s of Nature
IX . Radiant En ergy
X . The Law of Attractio n
XI The Theo ry
. of Dyn am ic Th o ught
X I I The Law
. of Vibrant Energy

M M
X III . The R i ddl e of the Sph i n x

M
XI V The .
ys tery of in d
XV . The Fine r Fo rc e s of the in d
XVI Thought in Action
.
 A fire mis t a n d a p l a n e t
-
,

A y st l a nd a cell
cr a ,

A j elly fi sh a n d a s uri an a ,

A nd c av s wh ere th e av e me n dwell ;
e c -

Th en a s ense o f l w a nd be a u t y
a ,

A n d a fa ce t urn ed f r o m th e cl o d ,

So m c all i t E o lu t i o n
e v ,

And oth ers c a ll i t G od .

”

“ L ik t id s o n crescen t s e a be a ch
a
e e -
,

Wh en th e m oo n is w a n d thi n ne ,

I n to o ur h ea rt s hi gh ye a rning s
Co m w lling a nd surgin g i
e e n,

Co me f r o m th e mys t i oce a n c

Wh o s e rim n o foot ha s t o d r ,

So me of us c ll i t L o n ging
a ,

A n d oth ers c a ll i t Go d ”
.

W H . .

10
 DYNA M IC T HO UG HT

CHAPTER I

I N T H E B EG I NNI NG

HIS b ook wi ll deal with Life It hold s .

that Life is Universal that it is i nh er e nt

—

in and manifests ( in di ffe r ent degr ees ) in

,

eve ry pa r t parti c le phase aspe c t c o ndition

, , , , ,

place or relationship i n th e Wo rld of Thin gs

, ,

that we call the Unive r se .

It holds that Life manifests in two as p ec ts or

fo rms which are gen e r all y fo un d by us in con
,

n e ction and c c ope r atio n with ea c h oth er b u t

-

whi ch are both probably a n exp re ssio n of

, ,

some O ne Thing highe r tha n either These .

two aspects o r fo rms whi c h togethe r go to

,

make up or produc e that which w e kn ow as

“ ”
Life , a r e kn own as ( 1 ) S ubsta nce or Mat
ter ; and ( 2 ) Mi n d In this b ook th e term
.

“ “
S ub sta nce is u s ed in p r efe r enc e to M at
11
 DYN AMIC THO UG HT
“
te r, to the fact that the term Matter
ow mg
has become closely identified with certain ideas
of the Materialistic school of thought and has ,

generally been reg arded by the public in the

“ ”
in the li ght of dead matter whereas this ,

book holds that all Substance is Alive The .

“ ” “
term Mind is used in the sense of Mi n d ,
” “ ”
as w e kn ow it rather than as Mind as it is
, ,

— or as “ ”
The Cosmic Mind
,
In some places .

“ ”
the term Mind principle is used to convey -

“
the idea of a portion of the Great Principle of
Mind of which that which we call Mind is ‘ ’
,

but a small and but partially expressed po r

”
tion T hese terms are explained and illus
.

“
tr ate d as we proceed The aspect of Energy . .

”
or Force is not treated as a separate aspect
or form of Life in this book for the reason, ,

that it is regarded as merely a manifestatio n

of Mind as will appear as we proceed
,
We .

have much to say re gardin g Motion but the ,

writer has tried to explain an d prove that at ,

the last all Motio n results from Mental Action

, ,

and that all Force and Energy is Vital Mental

—

Force and Energy .

This book is not i n tended to run alon g meta

physical o r theolo gical lines its field is di ffer
—

ent And so whi le it recognizes the impor

.
,

tance of these branches of human thought , still ,

it finds that its own particula r fi eld is sufficien t

12
 IN THE B EG I NN I NG
to engross its entire attention fo r the moment , ,

and consequently the aforesaid subjects shall

,

n ot be touched upon except in ci de n tall y i n con ,

n e ction with the subject matte r of the book .

This being the c ase there will be no discus

,
“ ” —
sion of the origin of Life the question of
“ ”—
creation the problems of theology and
“
metaphysics the riddle of the
— Why and
”
Wherefo re of Life and the Unive r se The .

writer has his own opinions upon these ques

tions but feels that this is not the place i n
,

which to air the same For the purposes of .

the book he prefers to leave every reader to

,

his own fav orite views and conceptions regard

ing these g reat subjects feeling that the views ,

r egardin g Life Mind Motion and Substance

, , ,

that are advanced in this book may be accepted ,

by any intelligent reader without prejudice to ,

his or her ac c epted religious or philosophica l

, ,

v iews .

The writer sees that this somethi ng called

”
Life exists he finds it in evidence every
—

where And he sees it always in its aspects of

.

Substance and Mind And h e feels justified in

.

“ ”
r egarding Life as always existing in and ,

manifestin g in these aspe c ts — always in con

“ ”
j unction— at least Life a s we know it
,
.

And he finds certain apparent Laws of Life

in operatio n in the Universe to whi c h al l Life ,
13
 DYN AMI C THOUG H T
in all of its aspects is apparently amen able ,
.

And he feels j u stified in c onsidering these Laws

con s tant a n d inva riable and unchangeable so
, ,

long as the Univers e as it now is e xists , , .

And with the above views in min d this boo k ,

will proceed to a consideration of its subj ect ,

without attemptin g to peer behind the veil sepa

rating the Universe from its Cause r Life —

from its Source .

But in justice to r eader subject and writer , ,

the latter has thought it well to state that he

doe s recognize not only th e veil but That
, ,

which is behind the Veil T o proceed without

- - - -
.

this statement would be unfair and misleadin g .

The writer wishes to be understood positively

upon this point even thou gh the declaration
,

may brin g forth the derisive j eer of those who

“ ”
feel that they have outgrown this conce p
tion ; or else the calm supe rio r pitying smile , ,

of those who feel that the Universe is its own

“ ”
Cause and E ffect By Universe the write r .
,
“ ”
m eans The whole b ody of Things ( Web
ster ) His declaration me ans that he believes
.

in That whi ch is above Things

- - - -
.

“
T he writer prefers not to attempt to de
” “ ”
fin e THAT which he call s Th e Infin ite .

“ ” “
The word Infin ite means without limi t i n
time space power capaci ty kn owledge or ex
, , , ,
” “ ”
ce l l e nce ( Webste r ) And to define i s to.

14
 I N THE B EG I NN I NG
” “ ” “
l imit ; mark the limits of ma rk the en d
” “
of,
etc The te rm defin e
. as appli e d to ,
“ ”
Th e In fin ite is r idic ulous an abs u rd pa r a
—
,
’
dox . The w rite r e c hoes Spin oza s stat e men t
“ ”
To defin e G od is to de ny Him An d so .

the r e shall b e n o attempt at d e fin ition or lim

itation .

B ut the h uma n min d i n c o n sid erin g th e sub

,
“
j cet is bound b y its own laws to thin k of The
,
”
Infin ite as Real a n d a c tuall y bein g and e x
,

iste nt if it thin ks of It at all

,
An d if it thi nks .

“ ”
of It a s Infinite it m ust by its own laws
, , ,

think of It as Causeless ; Ete rnal ; Abso l ut e ;

Everywhe r e present ; All Powe rful ; Al l Wise
- - -
.

The huma n mind is com p e lle d to so c on side r

The Infinite if it thi nk of It at all But eve n
,
.

“ ”
i n so thinkin g of It as being these things it ,
“ ” “
i s doing something like defining or l imit
” “
in g It fo r The Infinite must n ot only b e
,
“ ”
those things but it must be so m uc h mo r e
, ,
“ ”
that those thin gs a r e but a s a grai n of dust
“ ”
on the desert as c ompared to the real Being
of T he In finite
“ ”
For the things me n tio n ed
.

“ ” “ ”
are but finite or defined things thi n gs —

possessed b y the Fi n ite Things an d at the

—
,

best can be b ut s ymbols of the att ributes or

“
qualiti es of The Infin ite ; eve n the wo rds at
” “ ”
t rib utes or qua l ities being an abs u rdity as
app lied to The Infin ite This view a l so, m ust .
,

15
 DYN AMIC THO U GHT
be reported by the human reason if it thinks ,

about the matter at all .

The final report of the human reaso n r e

garding this matter is that it is in sol ubl e an d
unthinkable to that reason in its final analysis ,
.

This because the human reason is compelled to

use terms concepts etc derived from its ex
, , .
,

p e r ie n c e with finite t hi n g s and therefore h as ,

no tools measurements or other applia n ces

, ,
“ ”
with which to think of The Infinite Al l
. .

that it can do is to report that it finds that it

has limits itself and that it finds beyond those
,

limits That which it cannot define but whi ch it ,

is justified in considerin g as Infinite and su ,

perior to all finite conceptions such as Time , ,

Space Causation and Thought ( The idea of

,
.

‘
Thought being finite equally with Time Space
, ,

and Causation is not common by the writer is

, ,

compelled to place it in that cate g ory because ,

it is clearly under the laws of Time Space and , ,

Cause and E ffect and must be considered as

,
” “ ”
finite . The knowledge possessed by The
Infinite must be something far tra n scending
“
that which we know as the r esult of mental
“
operations or thinking , .

Certain fundamental truths seem to have

been impressed upon the human intellect and ,

the reason is compelled to report in accordance

therewith B ut an analysis of these funda
.

16
 I N THE B E GI NN I N G
mental t r uths is futile and the attempt o nl y
,

leads on e into wild speculations The only ad .

vantage that comes from the attempt is the

st r engthenin g of mental muscl e of those who
are able to stand the strain of th e e x er cise ; and
the fact that b y such attempt we are made
awa r e that we do n ot kn ow and cann ot kn ow , ,

by r easons of the natur e of the Intellect and ,

a r e thus preve n ted f r om harboring abs u rd and

chil dish theo r ies about th e U n kn owable T o .

know that we do n ot kn ow and c annot kn ow, is

,

the next best thi ng to actuall y knowing .

The writer does not wish to be un derstood ,

that the limits of the human reaso n are un al

te r ably fix ed . O n the co n t rary he believes ,

that additional fun damental portions of T r uth

a r e s uper imposed upon the mind of the race
-

f r om time to time An d he believes yes

.
, ,

kn ows, that there a r e r egions of the mind that

i
g ve r epo r ts hi ghe r tha n those conv e y ed
thr o ugh the In tellect An d he believ e s that
.

there are phases of kn owledge i n sto r e for

Ma n that will r aise him as m uch highe r tha n
his pres e nt position as that p r ese n t position is
,

s upe rior to that of the earthwo rm An d he be .

lie v e s that the r e B ei n gs i n ex iste nc e to day on -

pl a n es of Life as yet un d re amed of b y the aver

age man who fa r t r a n s c end Ma n in power wis
, ,

dom a n d n at ur e H e b el i e ves that M a n is

.

17
 DY NAMIC T H OU G H T
m erely just enterin g into hi s kin gdom and d oe s ,

not realize the g randeur of that whi ch is his

D ivine Inheritance .

It will be as well to mention here that the

classification of Mind with the aspects of Life ,

in conjunction with Substance and Motion , ,

does not mean that the E g o or Man is a ma

“

te rial thin g The writer believes that the E g o

.

is a transcendent Being partakin g in some ,

wonderful way of the essence of The Infin ite

that it is a Soul Immortal He believes that
— .

“
as Paul says We are all children of God but
, ,
”
what we shall be does not as yet appear .

These matters shall not be di scussed in thi s

book but the writer wishes to make himself
, l

clear in order to prevent m isun de r stan ding

,
.

“ fly
Again in this respect he must
,
in the fa c e
,
”
of Materialism .

But although the writer expresses hi s belief

,

in the existence of The Infinite and bases hi s ,

philosophy upon that basis he does not wish to ,

insist upon the identification of his conception

with that of any other partic ul ar conception of
the Source of Life N or does he insist upo n
.

names or terms in connection with the con ce p

, ,
“
tion He has used the term T he Infinite
.
, ,

because it seems to be broader than any othe r

of whi ch he co ul d think but he uses it merely ,

as a n ame fo r the Un Nameab l e So if the -

.
,

18
 I N THE B EGI NN I N G
r eade r p r efers he or she may use the te rms
, , ,
“ ” “ ” “ ” “
God D eity ; First Cause ; P ri nc i
” “
ple ; U nknowable Infin ite a n d Ete rn a l
” “
Energy “
The Thing in Itself ; The Abso
- -

”
lute ; or any of the othe r c o un tless te rms u sed
by Man in his attempt to n ame the Un N ame -

— —
able to describe the Un D es cr ibab l e to de -

fin e the Un D e fin abl e
-
.

An d all may retai n their ideas or lac k of ,

ideas regarding the relatio n of The Infinite to

,

their own particular religious views or lack of ,

views The philosophy of this book need not

.

’
di sturb a ma n s religious belief nor does it in
—

sist upon the man holding any special religious

belief Those are matters entirely for the e x
.

’
c roise of the man s own reason and conscience .

An d they may retain their own pet phi losophy

regar di ng the origin purposes or plan of the
,

productio n and existence of the Universe thi s—

book shall n ot meddle with their metaphysics

or philosoph y What is herein o ffered ma y b e
.

assi milated with the fundamental ideas of

n earl y eve ry form of religious o r philosophical
belief it bein g in the n atu r e of an Additio n
,

r ather tha n a Subtraction or D ivision Its ,

.

philosophy is Con strutciv e rathe r tha n De

st ruc tiv e .

19
 CHAPTER II

THI N G S AS T H EY AR E

N our l ast chapter we conside r ed th e Sourc e

I of All Things whi ch we called The Infinite
- -

, .

In thi s chapter we shall consider the Al l T hings -

itself which men call The Universe N ote that

,
.

the word Universe is derived from the Latin

”
word Unus meaning O ne and Ve rsor
“ ” “ ”
, , ,
“ ”
meaning to turn the comb ined word mean ,

ing literally O ne that turns or moves

,
“
,
”
The ,
.

Latin words in di cate a close meaning n amely , ,

O ne thin g in motion turnin g its several as ,

pe e ts and assuming many changes of appear

,

ance .

T he writer does not intend touching upon

theories of the origin of the Universe n or of ,

its purpose or of any design in its produc tio n

,

or mana g ement nor of its possible or probable

,

end These qu estions do not belong to our sub

.

j ce t an d then again as was said in the last

, ,

chapter speculation regarding it is devoid of

,

res ul ts and leads on e to quicksands and bogs

,

of me n tal r easo n in g from which it is difficul t,

20
 THI N G S AS THE Y ARE

to ex t r a c t o n esel f The a n swe r to th e R i d dle

.

of the Uni v e r se r ests wi th The In finite .

B ut it is di ffe r ent with the case of the mani

fe ste d Univ erse that is evidenced by our sens e s .

Science is a di fferent thing from metaphy sics ,

and its p r o c ess and mode of work are along

di fferent lines And muc h kn owledge of
.
,

Thin gs may be obtained from a c onsideratio n

of it — remembering always that its knowledge ,

is confined to Things and not to That which is ,

- -

back of T hi ngs An d so let us conside r the

- -
.
,

Univers e of Things .

Material Scie n ce has held that the Universe

is composed of two principles ( 1 ) Matter ; ( 2 ) ,

Energy or Force Some hold that these two .

principles really are aspects of the same thing ,

and that there is really b u t one Principle on e

M
,

aspect of which is shape form etc and called , ,

.
,

Matter ; the other a quality manifesting in 0

tion which quality is called Force O thers the
, .
,

most radi cal hold that there is nothing but

,

Matte r and that Fo r ce and Energy is but a

,
“ ” “ ”
quality or , power inherent in Matter ,

O thers hold that Force is the real thing and

“ ”

Matter but a fo rm of Force Al l branches hold

‘
.

to the idea that Matte r and E n ergy are always

found together and ca n not be thought of sepa
,

r ate ly Matter and Fo r ce are held to be Eter

.

nal and Infinite it followin g that there can be

, ,

21
 DYN AMIC THO UG HT
no addition to or subtraction from eithe r ; a ll
,

apparent loss and gain creation an d destruo

,

tion being but chan ge of form or mode G od .

is declared unnecessary and the Universe is

,

held to operate according to certai n Laws of

Matter or Force ( either or both ) whi c h a r e un
chan geable and immutable eternal and always
— .

valid Mind and Thought are held to be prod

.

ucts of properties of Matter or Force ( one or

both ) secreted evolved or produced in the

, , ,

Brain The Soul is rele gated to the waste

M
.

heap and discarded as useless in the new

,
“
philosophy .ol e sch ott said Thought is a
,
” “
motion of Matter ; and Hol bach that Matter ,

e nj oys the power of thinkin g N atural .

”
Laws are held to be s ufficient fo r the explana
tion of all phenomena although ignorin g the
,

fact that the reason has never before formed

“ ”
the conception of a law without thinking it ,
“ ”
necessary to think of a law maker or a -

power to enf orce and administer the law How .

ever the phi losophers hold that it is no more

,

difficult to think of such a l aw than to try to

form an idea of Space or Eternity both of ,

which are unthinkable to the h uman reason but ,

both of whi ch are admitted as self evident -

facts .

But notwithstandin g thi s somewhat crude

“ ”
an d r aw reasonin g Material Science has ao
,

22
 T H I N GS AS THE Y ARE
c omplished a wo n derf ul wo rk i n the wo rld a nd ,

has b r ought to light facts of in estimable val u e

to Man in mastering the material wo rld a n d i n ,

formin g correct ideas of the sol utio n of ma

te rial di ffic ulties The facts of Mate rial Sci
.

ence enables the world to cheerful ly overlo o k

its theories And even the theories are r apidl y
.

undergoing a change and as we have stated

, , ,

some of the most advanced scientists are rapid

l y r eaching the positio n of the O cc ultists and
mystics brin ging with them a mass of fa c ts to
,

back them up to exhibit to the O ccultists who

,

dealt with principles rather tha n with details ,

or material facts so far as fun dame n tal the o

,

ries were concerned Each is boring his way

.

through the mo un tai n tunne l of the Unkn own ,

and both will meet i n the c e n tre thei r l i n es ,

meeting each other without a variation B ut .

the O ccultists wil l call the tunnel centre Mind -

and the sci e ntists will call it Matter but both ,

wil l be speaking of the same thing And the .

Ca u ser of the mo un tai n wil l probab ly kn ow

that the y both a r e right .

B ut we are speaking of the new school of ad

,

v an ce d Material Scien c e n ow— not of the ol d

“ ”
conservative Al l is Matter people who have ,

bee n left behi nd T he new school speaks of

.

S ubstance n ow instead of Matter and as cribes

, ,
“ ”
to Substa n ce the p r ope r ties of Ma tte r Eu ,

23
 DYN AMIC THOUGHT
e rgy, and somethi ng that they call Sensation ,
,

by whi ch they mean Mind in a crude form and ,

“ ”
f r om which they say Mind and Soul evolved .

This new school of Scientists are ve ry di ffer

ent from their predecessors they are less
—
“ ” “
hide bound
-
and far from bein g so cock
,
”
sure . They are seeing Matter melting into
Energy and givin g sign s of Sensation and
, ,

they are beginnin g to feel that after all there , ,

must be a Thin g in Itself that is the real basis

- -

,
“
of or
,
real thin g in Substance There is .

“
heard very little amon g them about dead mat
” “ ” “
ter ; blind force ; or of the mechanical
”
theory of Life and the Universe Instead of .

it bein g a bi g machi ne operated under mechan

,

ical laws with Life as the steam the Universe

, ,

is beginning to be regarded as somehow filled

with Life and Science is finding new examples
,
“
of Life in unexpected qua rters and the dead,
”
matter area is bein g narrowed .

Men who have followed the advances made

by r ecent Science are holding their breaths in
awe and earnest expectation and those who
—

are pushi n g the inquiries and investi gations to

the furthest extent are showin g by their ea ger
faces an d trembling hands that they feel that
they a r e very close to the bo r de r lin e separa
ting the ol d Materialism from a N ew Science
that will give Thought and Philosophy a new
24
 THI N GS AS THE Y ARE
impet u s and a n ew platfo rm S uch men a re
.

feelin g that they a r e seeing the ol d Matter

—
melting awa y into somethin g e l se the ol d
theories are fallin g apart un der the light of
new discoveries and these men feel that they
—

are penetrating a n ew and hitherto un e xplored

regio n of the Unkn own Ma y succes s be theirs
.
,

for they a r e now on the right r oad to T r uth .

I n the followi ng chap ters we shall se e fre

“ ”—
quent references to Science and when we
u se the wo r d we shall know it means thi s new
school of Scientists rather than the older
,

school that is now being superceded There is .

no conflict between True O ccultism and True

Science notwithstanding their directly oppo
,

site theories and ideals they are merely look

—

in g at the Truth from di fferent viewpoints— at

difi e re n t sides of the same shield A better .

da y is coming whe n they shall work together

, ,

in stead of in opposition There should be n o

.

pa r tisanship in the search for Truth .

T hings have worked thi s way ! O ccultism

would enunciate a theory or principle but —

would n ot attempt to prove it by material facts ,

for it had n ot gathered the facts having found ,

the pri n ciple within the mi n d rather than with

,

o ut
. Then afte r l aughing at the occult theory
,

or p rinciple ,
Science would search dilige n tl y
for material fa c ts to prove an opposite theory ,

25
 DYNAMIC THO U GHT
and i n so doing would unearth n ew facts that
would support the O ccultists contention Then .

Science would discard its old theory ( that is ,

the youn ger men would the old ones never )

—
,

and proceed to proclaim a new theory or prin

cip l e
,
under a new n ame and backed up with ,

a mass of facts and experiments that would cre

ate a new school with many enthusiastic fol
lowers The old claim of the O ccultists would
.

then be forg otten or else go unrecognized under

its old name ; or disguised by the fantastic and
biz ar re coverings which some so called O ccult -

ists had draped around the ori ginal Truth .

But so long as Truth is being uncovered

, ,

what matters it who does the work or by what ,

name he calls his school The movement is .

ever fo rward and upward what matter the

,
—

banner un der which the armies move ?

In this book the writer will advance a very
di fferent theory of the Universe of All Thin g s -

from that of Modern Science although he feels ,

that his theory may easily be reconciled with

the most advanced views of that school .

In the first place as he has stated in the first

,

chapter he does not hold that the Universe

, ,

as we kn ow it is self sufficient but he recog

,
-

n i z e s a Somethi ng back of all phenomena and

“
appearan c es which Something he calls Th e
,
”
Infinite .

26
 THI N G S AS THE Y ARE
An d h e di ffers v e ry mate rially f r om the
v iews of those who c laim t hat Min d is but a

property or quality or something p r oceeding

, ,

from Matte r or Fo rc e or Matter Fo r ce or

,
-

Forc e Matte r a cc ording to the views of the

- —

r espective schools He takes a n en ti r el y dif

.

fe re n t and opposite position .

He holds that all that we call M att e r ( or Sub

stance ) and Mind ( as w e kn ow it) are but as
pe e ts of somethin g in finitely highe r and which ,
“ ”
may be called the Cosmic Mind He holds .

“ ”
that what w e call Mind is but a pa rtial mani
fe station of the Cosmic Mind An d that Sub .

stance or Matte r is but a cruder or grosse r

form of that which we call Mind and which has ,

bee n manifested i n orde r to give Mind a B ody

through which to operate B ut this view h e .

merel y states in pa ssing for he makes n o at ,

tempt to demo n strate or p r ove the same his ,

idea b eing that it forms a di fferent part of th e

“
gen eral s ubject than the phase of D ynami c
”
Thought , to the c o n side r atio n of whic h this
book is devoted .

He also di ffe r s v e ry materially f r om the M a

te rial istic schoo l in his c on c eptio n of Forc e or
Energy Inst e ad of regarding F orce as a dis
.

tinc t prin c iple a n d as something of which Min d

,

is but a form he walks boldl y out into the arena

,

of Scientifi c Tho u ght and throwing down hi s

,

27
 DYN AMIC THOUGHT
“
ga un tlet proclaims his theory that The r e is
,

no such thi ng as Force apart from Life and

M
” “
Mind All Force and Energy 1s the p r oduct
of Life and Mind — all Force Energy and o ,

tion result from Vital Mental Action all — -

Force Ener gy an d Motion is Vital Mental

,
-

” “
Forc e Energy and Motion
,
The Mind .

abidin g in and permeatin g all Substance n ot ,

only has the power to T hink but also the power ,

to Act and to manifest Force and Ener gy

, ,

which are its inherent and essential proper

”
ties .

He also takes the position that Mind is i n

and about and around Everything An d that .

“ ”
Everything is Alive and T hi nking And .

“ ”
that there is no such thin g s as D ead Matter -
,
“ ”
or Blind Force but that all Substan ce even
-

, ,

to the tiniest Particle is permeated with Life

,

and Mind and that all Force and Motion is

,

caused and manifested by Mind .

He holds that all forms of Force Energy and ,

Motion from the Attraction of the Particles of

,

Matter and their movements in response the r e

,

to up to the Attraction of Gravitation and the

, ,

response of the Worlds a n d Suns and Sta r s , , ,

and Planets thereto— are forms of Mental En

,

e rgy and Force and Action An d that from

, .

the tiniest atom or pa rticle to the gr eatest Sun

, ,

-
all obey thi s Great Action of Mind— thi s
28
 THI N GS AS THE Y ARE
G reat Fo rc e of Min d this G re at E ner gy of
—

Min d this G r eat Power of Mind

— .

An d upon thi s ro c k— thi s rock of T ruth he ,

believes it to be he takes his stand and an

—
,

n oun ce s hi s belief
, and bids al l comers tak e
-

n otice of what he believes to be a germ thought -

that will grow develop a n d in crease so that it

, ,

will eventually permeate all Scienti fic Tho ught

as the y ears r oll along He calls thi s th e o ry
.

“
The Theo ry of Dyn ami c Tho ught .

29
 CHAPTER III

I
T H E U N VE RSALITY O F LI F E AND M
I
ND

HE writer has deemed it adv isable to

“ ”
preface hi s consideration of Mind in
itself as well as of Subs tance and Motion with
, ,

two chapters the purpose of which will be to

,

demonstrate that Mind in some form or d e

,

gree is to be found in conn ectio n with all

,

Thin g s and that Everythin g has Life and

— —

that Mind is an accompaniment of all Life To .

“ ” “
many the term Min d means only the think
”
ing quality of man or perhaps of the lower
,
“ ”
animals ; and Life the property only of such
organic creatures For that reason it has been
.

deemed advi sable to point out that Life and

Min d are found even in the lowest forms of
substance — e ven in the in organic world .

In thi s chapter and from now on the write r ,

“ ”
shall use the term the Mind etc to indicate, .
,

the particular mental principle of the creature

or thin g — the bit of Min d that is segregated
from the r est and which ea ch pe r so n thi nks of
,
“ ” “ ”
as mine just as he thi nks of my body as
, ,

distinguished from the un iv ersal s upply of

30
 THE U N I VE RSALI TY OF LI F E AND M I ND
“ ”
S ubstance The te rm Min d wi ll be u s e d in
.

its Uni versal sense

M
.

’
An d the write r in tends to u se Elmer Gates
” “
te rm,
e n tation in the sense of e ffort ; ao
,
”—
tion ; or e ffect ; in or of the Mind in short , ,
“ ”
mental process The word is u seful and
.

when on e has lea rned to use i t he will prefer it ,

to the more complicated terms Remember .

,
“ “
then please
,
— Mentation means Mental
”
P rocess Mentation in cludes that which we
.

“ ”
call Thought as well as some more eleme n
,

tary forms of mental process that we are n ot i n

the habit of dignifying by the term T hought , ,

whi c h latter we usually rese rv e for men tal

process of a higher order .

“ ”
So then Mind is the somethi ng of which
, ,
’ “
o n e s particular Mind is composed ; The
”
Mind i s that something possessed by one by ,
“ ” “ ”
and through which he thinks ; Mentation
“ ”
is mental process ; and Thought is a ad
v an ce d kind of Me n tatio n At least the said .
,

words will be so emp l o yed in thi s book f r om ,

n ow on .

In this chapter y o u a r e asked to c o n sider the

,

fact that Life is Universal— that Everything is

Alive An d that Mind and Me n tation is an at
.
,

tribute of Life and that consequentl y Eve ry

, , ,

thing has Mind a n d is able to e xp re ss a d eg ree

,

of M en tat i on .

31
 DYN A MI C THOUGHT
Forms of Life as we know them are always
, ,

seen as possessin g two aspects v ia ( 1 ) B ody , ,

( Substa n ce ); and ( )
2 Mentation ( Mind ) The .

two aspects are always fo un d in combination .

There may be livin g creatures who occupy

bodies of so fine a form of Substance as to be
invisible to the human senses but their bodies
—

“ ”
would be Substance just as much as is the
“ ”
body of the granite rock And in o r der to .
,
”
think ,
these being s woul d need to have a
material somethin g corresponding to the brain ,

though it be finer in quality than the rarest gas ,

vapor of electric wave N o body without

, .
,

Mentation ; no Mentation without a body This .

last is the invariable law of the world of

Thin g s And naught but The In fin ite That
.
—

- -
hi
which is above T n g s can be exempt from
-—

that law .

In order to grasp the idea of the Unive rs ality

of Mind let us go back to the elementary forms
,

of Thin g s and step by step see how Mentatio n

, , ,

manifests itself in every point on the scale

“
from mineral to man— usin g bodies ranging
from the ha r dest rock to that finest fo rm of
known S ubstan ce the Brain of Ma n As
’

— .

Mind advan ces in the scale of evolution it cre

ates its own working instrument— the body ( in
cluding the brain ) and shapes and moulds it to ,

admit of the fullest possibl e e xp re ss i o n of M en

32
 THE U N I V ERSALIT Y OF L IFE A ND MI ND

tation possible at that stage Mind is the .

moulder body ( and b rai n ) that whi ch is

—

mo ulded And Inclination D esire and Will

.
, , ,

are the motive powers leading to g r adual Un

fol dm e n t the impelling cause being the craving
,

for Satisfaction .

We shall make our j ourney backward and —

ignoring Beings hi gher in the scale we shall ,

start with Man Leavin g ou t of the considera

.

tion for the moment the fact of the e xi stence

, ,
“ ” “ ”
of the Ego or Spirit of Man whi ch is
, ,

hi gher than Body or Mind and c onsidering

—

“ ”
the Mind of Man rather tha n the Man him ,

self— w e have our starting poi n t on the down

ward j ourney of investigation We need not .

devote much attention to the consideration of

the Mind of Man at this stage although we, ,

shall have much to do with it late r on , .

But we may undertake a brief consideration

of the descending de g rees of Mentation as

manifested by Man as we pas s down the s c ale ,

in the human family considering in turn the , ,

N ewtons Shakespeares Emersons Edisons

, , , ,

and thei r b r others in intellect in the field of ,

mathemati c s literature music art invention

, , , , ,

science statesmanship business skilled work

, , ,

manship etc respectively From these high

,
.
, .

levels we pas s down gradually thro ugh the , ,

strata of men of but a sli ghtly lower degr ee of

33
 DYN AMIC THO UG H T
“
i ntellect down through the strat a of the av
—

”—
erage man down through the strata of the
ignorant man down through the strata of the
—

lowest type of our own race and tim e— down

through the strata of the barba rian then on to ,

the savage then on to the D igger Indian the

, ,

Bushman What a difi e re nce from highest to

.

lowest a being from anothe r world would

—

doubt that they were all of the same fa mi ly .

Then we pass rapidly through the various

strata of the lower animal kin g dom from the
—

comparatively high degree of Mentation of the

horse the do g the elephant etc down through
, , ,
.
,

the descending scale of the mammals the de ,

gree of Mentation becomin g less marked at

each step of the journey Then on through the .

bi r d kingdom T hen through the world of rep

.

tiles Then through the family of fishes Then

. .

through the millions of forms of insect life in ,

cluding those wonderful creatures the ant and ,

the bee Then on through the shell fish family

.
-
.

Then on through the commun ity of sponges ,

polyps and other low forms of life Then on

, .

to the vast empire of the microscopi c creatures ,

whose name is le gion The n on to the plant .

“ ”
life the highest of which have sensitive cells
,

that r esemble brains and n erves d escen din g

—

by stage s to the lowe r plant life Then st ill .

l ower to the worl d of b acteria micr obe s , and ,

34
 THE U N I VE RS AL IT Y OF L IF E A ND MI ND
infu so ria the groups of c ells with a c ommon
—

life the monera the single cell The mind

— — .

that has followed u s in thi s des c e n t of life from ,

“ ”
the highest form to the cell like thi ng m erely
-

“ ”
existin g in the slime at the bottom of t he
o c ean has acquired a sense of awe a n d sublim
,
“ ”
ity not dreamed of by the ma n on the st r eet .

The degrees of Mentatio n in the l ower ani

mal kin gdom are well known to all of u s there ,

fo r e we need not devote much time to thei r con

,

sideration at this time Although the degree

.

of Mentation in some of the l owl y form s of

animal life are scarcely above that of the pla n t
,

life ( in fact are inferior to that of the highest

,

plants ) still we have accustomed ourselves to

,
“ ”
the use of the wo r d Min d in connection with
even the lowest animals while we hesitate to
,

apply the word to the plants .

It is tr u e that some of us do not like to think

“ ”
of the lower animals reasoning so we use ,
“ ”
the wo r d Instinct to den ote the degree of
Men tatio n of the lower animal The write r .

do e s n ot object to the word ; in fact he sha ll u se ,

it for the sak e of di stinguis hi n g betw e e n the

“
several mental states But r emembe r
.
,
In ,
”
stinct is but a term u sed to denote a l esser
“
form of R easo n ” “ ”
a n d the Instinct of the
-

horse or dog i s a fine thin g whe n we conside r

“
th e Reaso n of the B u shm a n or D igge r In
”

35
 DYN AMIC TH OUGHT
dian However we shall not quarrel about
.
,
“ ” “ ”
words Both Reason and Instinct mean
.

“ ”
degrees or forms of Mentation the word we ,

are using The lower forms of animal life ex

.

bibit Mentation alon g the l ines of sex action ; -

feelin g and taste Then by de g rees come smell

.
,

hearin g and si ght And then somethin g ve ry

“
like reaso ni n g in the case of the dog ele ,

phant horse etc Mentation e verywhere in

, ,
.

the animal kin gdom in some degr ee N o doubt, .

about Life and Mentation there , .

But what abo u t Mentation and Life in the

plant life ? All of you admit that there is
”
Life there but about Mentation well let
’

—
, ,

us see ! Some of you draw the line at the word

“ ”
Mind in connection with plants althou gh ,
“ ”
you freely admit the existence of Life there .

“
Well remember our axiom— no Life without
,
”
Mentation Let us try to apply it
. .

’
A moment s reflection will give you instances
of Mentation amon g the plants Science has .

“ ”
called it Appetency rather than admit ,
“ ” “ ”
Mind the word Appetency bein g defined
,
“
as an instinctive tendency on the part of low
fo rnis of organic life to perform certain acts
necessary for their well being— such as to se -

lect and absorb such particles of matter as

”
serve to support and nourish them Well .
,
’
that looks like a degree of Mentation do e s n t ,

36
 THE U N I VERSAL IT Y O F LIFE A ND MI ND
it ? Man y young animals evidence little or
“ ”
nothi n g mo r e than Appetency in suckling .

“ ”
We shall adopt the word Appeten cy to de s
ignate th e Mentation in plant life Remembe r -
.

this please
,
.

An yone who has raised trees or plants has

noticed the instinctive e fforts of the plant to
reach the water and sunlight Potatoes in .

dark cellars have been known to send forth

shoots twenty feet in le n gth in order to reach
an opening in the wall Plants have bee n .

known to bend over during the night and dip

their leaves in a pot of wate r several in ches
awa y T he tendrils of climbing plants seek
.

for the stake or support and find it too al

, , ,

though it has been changed daily The tendril .

will retwine itself after it has bee n un twisted

,

and bent in anothe r directio n The tips of the .

roots of the tree are said to show a sensitive

ness almost akin to that of the limb of an an i
mal and evidently possess something akin to
,

ne rv e matter .

D uhamel placed some b ea n s in a cylin der of

moist earth Whe n the y bega n to sprout he
.
,

turn ed the cylinder aro un d qua r te r way of its

circumference ; then a little more the next day ;
and so on a little each day un til the cylinder
, ,

had described a c omplete revolution had been

—

turned completel y aro un d Then the bean s .

37
 DYN AMI C TH O UGHT
we r e taken f r om the earth and lo ! the r oots .

and sprouts formed a complete spiral With .

every turn of the cylin der the roots a n d sprouts

had changed their position and direction the —

“
r oots striving to grow downward ”
and th e ,
” —
sprouts striving to grow upward until the
’
spiral had formed Akin to this is the boy s.

trick of uprooting a sprouting seed and re ,

planting it upside down in whi ch case the ,

sprouts be gin to tu rn a semicircle until it i s

able to grow strai ght u p to the su rface of the
ea rth while the r oots describe a semicircle
,

un til the y can grow downward on c e more .

“
And so on story after story of Appetency
,

or Mentation in plants mi ght be told un til we ,

reach the insect catchi ng species when even the

-

most co n servative observer i s forced to admit

“
that ! Well it does alm ost seem like think
,
’ ”
in g doesn t it ?
, Any lover of plants flowers ,

or trees and who has been able to study them

,

at first hand does n ot need much argument to

,

prove that plan t life exhibits t r aces of Menta

-

tion some of it pretty far advanced too Some

, ,
.

love r s of plants go so far as to claim that one

“ ”
must love plants before they will succeed in
gr on them and that the plan ts feel and re
,

sp on d to the feeling But the writer does not

.

in sist upo n this b ut merely men tions it in pass

,

38
 T HE U N I VE RSAL I T Y OF LIF E A ND MI ND
B efo re l eav ing th e subj e c t of M en tati o n in
p l a n ts th e w rit er 1s tempt e d to steal a l ittle
,

mo re spa c e a n d tel l you that plants do mo r e

than r eceive sensations of l ight and moisture .

They exhibit r udi mentary taste as well .

Hae ckel r elates a n i n te r estin g sto ry of an

inse c t c atching plan t H e stat e s that while it
-
.

will bend its leaves whe n an y solid body ( e x

ce p ting a r aindrop ) touc hes its s u rface still it ,

will sec re t e its a c rid digestive fluid only whe n

that object happe n s to be nit r ogenous ( meat or
cheese ) The pla n t is able to distinguish its
.

meat diet ( its food be in g i n se c tivo r ous ) and ,

while it will supply its gastri c j ui c e for meat

and cheese as well as fo r the insec t it will
, ,

n ot do so for other solids to which it is in dif

fe re nt . H e also mentions the fact that roots

of trees a n d pla n ts are able to taste the di ffe r
e n t qualities of soil and will avoid poor soi l
,

and plunge into the richer parts of the earth .

The sexu a l o rgan ism and life of pla n ts also

afi ords a great field fo r stud y to the student
“ ”
h un tin g for eviden c es of life a n d Menta
”
tio n i n that kingdom .

The motio n or c i r c ul ation of the sap in tree s

a n d pla n ts was forme rl y c o n side r ed to be due
“
to c ap il la ry att r a c tio n a n d purel y mecha n ical
”
l aws, b u t r e c en t scien tific e xpe rimen ts have
s h own it to b e a v i tal actio n an ev id e nc e of
—

39
 DYN AMIC THOUGHT
life a n d Mentation the experiments having
—

proven that if the cell substance of the pla n t

-

was poisoned or paralyzed the circ ulation of

‘
,

sap immediately ceased although the mechan

,
”
ical principles had n ot been in te rfered with
in the least
.

And n ow on to the mineral kin gdom .

” “
What you may c ry Mind and Mentation
, ,

in the mineral and chemical world— surely

”
n ot ? Y es even in these low planes may be
,

found traces of mental action There is Life.

everywhere even there An d where there is

— .

Life there is Mind Away back among the

.

chemical principles and the minerals we may

,

g in o
o ur sea r ch fo r Life and Mind the y can
—

n ot e scap e us ev en th ere !
—

40
 C HAP TER IV

LI FE AND D ON G THE AT O M
I N AM
M S

T O the maj ority of persons the title of thi s

c hapte r would seem a n absurdity N ot to .

“ ” “ ”
speak of Inorganic Mind the idea of Life ,

in the Inorganic World wo ul d seem a ri di culo u s

“ ”
paradox to the man on the st r eet who thinks
“ ”
of Substance a s dead lifeless a n d inert
, .

And to tell the t ruth eve n S c ie n ce has held

, ,

this view until a comp ar ativel y r ecent peri od ,

laughing to sco rn the ol d O ccult Teaching that

the Unive r se is Alive and capable of Thinking
,
.

But the r ecent discoveries of modern Science

has changed all this and we no longe r hear
,
“ ” “
Scie n ce speaking of dead Matte r or bli n d
”—
Force it re c ognizes that these te rms are
meaningless and that the d r eams of the ol d Cc
,

c ul tists a r e c oming t r ue S c ie nc e c onfronts a

.

live and thin ki n g Unive r se She is dazzled b y

.

the sight and wo uld shade he r e yes fearing to

, ,

see that which she feels mu st presen t itself to

her vision whe n her ey es be c ome a ccu stome d
to th e sight .

41
 DYN A MI C TH O UGHT
B u t a few darin g mi nds amo n g the scien tifi c
i nvestigators ar e dreaming wonde rful d r eams
to day and they tell u s in b r oken tones of the
-

wonderful vi sions that a r e pass in g before their

sight They da r e not tell it all for they fear
.
,

the ridicule of thei r fellows T heir v isions are

l
.

o f L ife — Univ e rsal Life In its i nvestigations

.

of the Mate r ial Science has penetrated so far

,

into the r ecesses of Thin gs that its most ad

v an ce d thinke r s and i nvestigato r s n ow fin d
themselves stan din g in the p r es en c e of the Im
material .

Scienc e to day is p r o cl aimin g the n ew doc

-

“ ”
trine— that is the same as the ol d doct r in e
“
of the O ccultists — the doctrine of Life Eve ry
”—
whe r e Life even i n the hardest rock !
Before entering into our c onside r atio n of the
evidence of Men tatio n i n the In o rganic world ,
“
let u s accustom o u rselves to the idea of some
”
thin g l ike Life bein g fo un d ther e It will be
.

better for us to approach the subje c t by eas y

stages Whe r e there is Life ther e must be
.

Mind so let u s first look for e v i dences of Life

— .

“ ”
The ma n on the st r eet wo uld r e qui r e
some thi n g mo r e tan gible than s c ientific ex
“ ” “ ”
planation s of sensati o n ,
att r a c tion
,
et c
.

What can we o ff e r him as a n ill u st r atio n ? L e t

u s see !
“
S uppos e w e c all the att en ti o n of th e m an
42
 LIFE A ND M
I ND AMO N G TH E ATO M S
to the fa c t that metals get ti red afte r c onside r
able work without periods of rest Scie n ce .

“ ”
calls thi s the fatigu e of elasticit y When .

the metals a r e given rest the y r ecupe r ate and

,

r egai n their fo rmer elasticity a n d health .

“ ”
The man may remembe r that hi s r azor acts
this wa y occasionally and if he talks the mat
—

ter over with his ba rber hi s suspi c io n s wil l be

,

verified .

Then if he cons ults a mu sicia n frie n d h e

, ,

will be info rmed that tuning forks also become -

tired and lose thei r vib r ating quality u ntil

, ,

they are given a rest The n hi s machini st

.

friend will tell him that machinery in factories

must be given a rest oc c asionally else it wi ll
, ,
“ ”
begi n to disi n tegr ate and die Machine ry.

will go on a strike for a re st i f it is overworked

, .

Then metals c o n t r a c t disease Scie n ce in .

fo rm s us that zin c a n d tin have bee n infecte d ,

and the infectio n has spread from sheet to

sheet crumbling the metal into powde r— the
spread of the i nfectio n resembling the spread of
a plague among animals or pla n t l ife Scie n ce -
.

has experimented with coppe r a n d i r on a n d ,

has fo un d that these metals ma y be poisoned

with chemical s and wi l l remain in a weakened
,

c ondition until antidotes a r e administe r ed .

Win dow glas s work e r s de cla re that the r e is

-

“ ”
s uch a thin g as glas s dis e ase , that will rui n
-

43
 DYNAMIC TH O UGHT
fin e stain ed glass windows unless the inf ec ted
“ ”
p anes are removed The glass
. di sease starts -

with on e pane and spreads g radually to the

,

entire window and from there to other win

,

dows .

Metallurgists have found that when metallic

ores are put un der certain forms of pressure ,

they seem to lose strength and become weak ,

until the pressure is removed .

“
D o these things mean anythin g to the Man
”
of the Street ?
Another step in the consideration of Life in
the Inor ganic world is the realization of the
,

fact that afte r all there is but the very finest

, ,

line separating the hi gher forms of Mineral

“ ”
life from the lower forms of ve g etable life
, ,
“ ”
or the life of those T hings which we may
“ ”
call either plants or animals The Life line .
-

is bein g pushed further back every da y by ,

“ ”
scientific investigation an d the livin g thing
,
“ ”
of today was the inanimate thin g of yes
te r day . We hea r much talk in the n ewspapers
“
about some scien tist or another discovering
, ,
” “ ”
life
,
or c r eating life in some inanimate
,
”
substa n ce Bless your hearts you who are
.
,
“ ”
ala rm e d by these reports no one can cr eate
—

life in anythi ng for it already e xists the r e

,
.

“ ”
The discove ry is simply the r ealizatio n of
thi s fa c t .

44
 LIFE A ND MI ND AMO N G TH E ATOMS
Science b y means of the mic ro s c ope has
, ,
“ ”
brought to light forms of livin g things ,

r esembling in appearance the fin e dust of in

organic minerals These low forms of life
.

exhi bit but the simplest vital processes the ,

same very closely resembling che mi cal pro c

esses although just a shade higher in the scale
, .

Living creatures have been found which co uld

be dried and laid aside like dust for several
y ears and then revived b y being immersed in
,

water when they would resume their vital proc

,

e ss as if they had been awakened from a sleep .

“ ”
Forms of life called Baccilli have been dis
,

covered that can pass throu gh degrees of heat

and cold that can be expressed only by va gue
symbols or figures the heat and cold being so
,

intense that the un scientific mind cannot im

agine it .

“
In appea r a n ce the D iatoms resemble the
“ ”
chemical crystals These D iatoms are min
.

“ ”
ute one celled living Things
-
having a hard ,

but thi n siliceo u s covering or shell of extreme ,

“
delicac y They are what are known as mic r o
.

”
scopic creatures that is visible only through
—
,

the microscope Some of them are so small

.

that it would take a thousand or mo r e to c ove r

the head of a pin But remembe r this the .
—
,
“ ”
microscope r eveals them as living creatures
performing v i tal functions The y are found .

45
 DYN AMIC THOUGHT
i n the deep waters of the ocean To the naked .

“ ”
eye they appea r l ike fine sand or dirt b ut ,

un de r the most powe rful mic r oscope they are ,

see n to c omp r ise many species and va rieties ,

exhi biting many pe culia r shapes and fo rms in —

“
fact they have been called living geometrical
,
”
forms their shapes and appea r an c es almost
,

exactly resemblin g those of the che mical and

mineral crystals .

Science info rms us that these a n d similar

microscopic creatur es n umber thousands of
,

families or species and it i s thought that the

,
-

varieties of mi c roscopic creatures o utnumber

the varieties of creatu res visible to the unaided
sight And remember that there is probabl y
.
, ,
“ ”
a still gre ate r world of sub microscopic -

creat ures that is a wo rld inv isibl e e v e n when

,
'

the most powe rful microscope is used Who .

knows what wonde r s are to be found there

what fo rms of creatures live and move and ,

have their being the r e .

In passing b y the subj ect of the resemblance

between the outward forms of liv ing things an d
the crystals it i s interestin g to note how the
,

c ry stals of f r ost an d ice resemble the forms

of lea v es br an c hes flowe r s foliage e tc — the
, , , ,

pane of gl ass c overed with these f r osty fo rms ,

r es emble s a ga r den Th e dis k of sal tpete r

.
,

46
 LI F E AND M I N D AMO N G T H E ATOMS
un d er the e fi e ct of pola rized light very clos ely ,

r esembles the fo rm of the o r chid .

R ecen t s c i e ntific experiments have shown

that c e r tai n m e tallic salts when subj ected to
,

a galvanic curren t group themselv e s aro und

,

on e of the poles of the b atter y, a n d ass u me a

mu shroom lik e shap e a n d appea r ance At fi rst

-
.
,

they seem to be t r a n spa r ent but gradually they ,

assume colo r the top beco ming a b right r ed

, ,

with the under side showing a pal e r ose colo r

-
,

the st e m being of a pale straw c olo r The dis .

coverers of these pec ul ia r forms c alled them ,

“
by the Germa n equivalent for in organi c mu sh
”
r ooms, but e v e n this term seems s c ar c el y
wo r thy of them, fo r the y even show a t r ace
of s omething like o r ga n s Unde r the micro
.

scope the y a r e seen to have fin e c anals o r vein

lik e channels running th r ough their stems ,
“ ”
f r om top to base And through these veins
.

“
the thing absorbed fresh materia l and
“ ”
actually g r ew like low forms of fun gu s lif e -
.

We r e these thi n gs merely minerals or chemica l

substances or were they low forms of orga nic
,

life ? The l ines between the In organi c and the

O rganic are being wiped out r apidl y The .

Supreme Powe r that cause d L i f e to B e cause d ,

it to All and did n ot divide I ts manifesta

,

tio n s into D ead Thin gs and Live T hi ngs bu t

- -

breathed in to al l the B reath of Life An d th e .

47
 DYN A MI C TH O UGHT
more clearly we see the actual evidence of this ,

the g reater does that Supreme Power seem

to us.

A very low form of livin g creatures called

the Monera is held by Science to be the one

M
,

of the strands of the connectin g link between

the org anic and inorg anic worlds The 0.

nera are the lowest and simplest form ( at

least so far kn own ) of org anic life They may
.

“ ”
be said to be organic creatures w ithout
org an s— being but little more than simple cells
— tiny globules of plasm surrounded by a thin
,

membrane their sole vital function bein g the

—

absorption of no u rishment through the pores

of their covering ( just as a piece of chalk would
absorb water ) and the consequent conversio n
of the n our ishm n t into material for g rowth the ,

whole process resemblin g chemical action The .

Monera reproduce their kind simply by cl e av

a ge or separation of the substance of the
mother cell into two and so on bein g little more
, ,
“ ”
than the g rowth of crystals The Monera .

are eve rywhere recognized without q uestion

, ,
“ ”
as living creatures but they exhibit merely
,

a trace more of life than do certai n fo rms of

crystals .
The difficulty in conside ring cry stals as
livin g thin g s is partially due to the outward
form and substance so diffre nt from the fo rm
,

48
 LI FE A ND MI ND AMO N G THE ATOMS
“
a n d s ubsta nce of the hi ghe r liv ing things .

B ut we hav e see n that the D iatoms took on

shapes of cry stals a n d that the o u t er shell or
,

c o v e r in g was simila r to silicia a min eral the , ,

inn e r substance being bu t a tiny speck of plasm ,

simi la r to that of the substance of a plant c ell .

And then we ma y look to the tiny bit of chal k

d u st which was once the skeleton fo rm of a -

l ivin g cr eat ur e The same is tr u e of c o r al In

. .

the very l ow fo rms of life the skeleto n or form

‘
, , ,

i s the thing most apparent the plasm of l ivin g

,
”
sub sta nc e being still smaller a n d les s ap ,

parent An d y et th e skeleto n or sh ell was

.
, , ,

fo rmed b y the v ital processes of the creature ,

“ ”
and was a part of its body j u st as is the
,

skeleto n or bon y st r uctu r e of th e highe r

“
anima l s An d i n the same sense it is livi n g
.
,
”
substanc e An d r emember that the re is b u t
.
, ,
“ ”
littl e difi e re nce betwee n these bodi e s of the
l ow fo rms of l ife a n d the bo dies of cry stals
,
.

An d the chemi ca l c onstituents of its plas mi c

'

inn e r body is b ut slightl y di fferent from that of

the cry stals And its n at ure and v ital pro ce ss
.

are b y a shade highe r i n the scale tha n those of

the c ry sta l s .

You ma y as k why we ha v e said so much of

Cry stal s The r easo n is just this Scien ce has
.
—

begun to think of C ry stals as semi livin g -

thin gs a n d its most a dvan c ed i nv estigators a n d

,

49
 DYN A MI C TH O UGHT
“
t hi nkers g o further and assert that the Crys
tals are alive— Crystallization is an evidence
”
of l ife process .

Crystals ar ran g e themselves in wel l kn own -

a n d well de fin e d shapes direction and order

-

of formation being observed implicitly Each .

crystal follows the laws and habits of its kind ,

just as do plants and animals Its lin es of .

c rystallization a r e mathematically perfect and ,

accordin g to the laws of its being N ot onl y .

this but some substances have a range of six

,

or seven di fferent forms of cry stal forms pos -

sible to them In some cases a chemical element

.

assumes one form of crystal lization when it

manifests as on e mineral and a seco n d fbrm ,

when it manifests in another form in ea c h

—

case however it manifests along well kn own

,
-

and recognized courses of action movement , ,

and shapes .

“ ”
Crystals may be killed by a strong elec
trical dischar g e— that is they are so afi e cte d
,

that they disinte g rate their atoms separating

,

to form new combinations just as is the case ,

“ ”
with the bodies of hi gher forms of life .

Some scientists have gone so far as to cl aim

that they had discovered somethi ng akin to
rudimentary sex action in certain c ry stals re
-

semblin g the sex process of the lowest plan t

-

life B u t this has n ot as yet been positively

.
, ,

50
 LIF E A ND MI ND AMO N G TH E ATOMS
established although it seems p r obable a n d
,

reasonable A re c ent writer in one of the

.

“
magazines has said Cry stallization as we are
, ,

to learn now is not a mere mechanical group

,
”
in g of dead atoms It is a birth . T hi s may .

“ ”
seem mere scientific poetry un til the proc
ess of crystallization is carefull y studied when ,

it will be seen to g ive evidence not only of ,

something like vital and mental action but ,

also something very much like reproductive

“ ”
functionin g of the lower forms of life .

”
There is an assimilation of mate rial to
build up the crystal in the first place just as ,

an animal assim i lates matter to build up its

“ ”
shell or a tree to form its bark The form
— .

“ ”
of the crystal is tr ul y its body and behind ,
“ ”
and in that body the r e is s om e thing at w ork
that is n ot th e body, bu t which is f orm ing it
.

And later on that crystal increases in size and

, , ,

then be gin s to separate into two throwing off ,

a smaller crystal identical i n form with the

,

parent crystal Thi s manne r of reproduction

.

is almost identical with the pro c es s of repro

duction in the lower forms of life “ ”
which ,

consist merely of a like separation of the parent

form into two and the throwing off of the off
,

spring .

The principal di fference between the growth

of c rystals and of the Monera is that the ,

51
 DYN A M IC TH OUG HT
C ry stals grow by absorbing fresh matte r an d
attaching it to their outer surface while the ,

Monera grow by absorbing fresh mate rial and

growing outwardly from withi n B u t this may
,
.

be acco un ted for by the di ff erence in the dens i ty

of their bodies the Crystal being very solid
, ,

while the Monera is like a thin j elly If th e .

Crystal had a soft interior it co ul d g row like

,

the Monera o r D iatom but the n it w ould be a

,

Diatom .

The process of c ry stallization is acco un table

only by the theory that in the crystal there
exists something like life and Mentation T here .

“
is something more than mere mechan ical
”
motion ,
or blind chance at work here D oes .

not the process of crystallization look like rudi

menta ry purposive action ? It may be said that
it is movement and action in accordance with
“ ”—
some established Law of N ature g ranted ,

but is not that also tr u e of the physical pro c

esse s and g rowth of hi gher forms of life ? I s
the formin g of the Crystal form to be con
-

“ ”
side re d as a mechanical e ffect and the fo rm
,
“ ”
ing of the shell of the Monera to be c on
”
side r e d a mental and vital action ? If so ,

wherefo r e ?
The poin t is that Crystals a c t as i f the y a re
”
alive, and c apable of ass imil ati o n gr owth , ,

a n d rep r oduc tion in a mann e r an d d egre e dif

,

52
 LIF E A ND MI ND AMO N G THE ATO M S
fe ring but very slightly from c orrespo n din g
“ ”
functioning of the lower forms of life .

“ ” —
V e r il y the Cry stals a r e alive a n d if alive
“ ”
the y m u st hav e at least a t r ace of Mi n d .

D oes it not appear that the y e xhi bit somethi ng

very like both ? ! uoting from a r ecent wr iter,
“
l et us n otice that ! Recent investigations in
the new depa r tment of scien c e which has bee n
,
‘ ’
termed plasmology show in crystals phe
,

n om en a which a r e absolutely analogous to vital

phenomena so much so that photographs of

—

certain forms produced i n the changes of c ry s

tals appear to be almost ex act duplicates of
those in the various lower forms of microbes .

The question has been raised as to whethe r the

microbe is no mo r e alive than the crystal or ,

the l atter e quall y en dowed with life as is the

”
fo rme r .

An d now a n other step in our search for L ife

, .

Remember that the hardest rocks a r e com

,

posed of crystals of certain kin d s An d if the .

,

higher cry stals have Life then it is onl y fai r

,

to suppose that the lower and cru de r fo rms

are likewise endowed even if in a still lower
,

degree And if all crystals are endowed with

.

Life the n the most solid r ocks bein g c omposed

, ,

of ag gr egatio n s of c ry stals m u st be masses of

—
Inorganic Life and conse quentl y of Inor ,

g an ic Mind A Crystal a c cording to Webste r

.
, ,

53
 DYN AMIC THOUGHT
“
is the regular form bo unded by plane sur ,

faces which a substance tends to ass ume in

,

solidifying through the inherent powers of

,

cohesive attraction .

That definition of Webster tells the whole

“ ”
story and we see that a Crystal is merely
,
“ ” “ ”
a re gular form of a Substance which ,
“ ”
the substance tends to assume in solidifyin g
-
that is in r e assumin g a solid form after
-

bein g in a liquid or melted state and that is ,

just what all the rocks of the earth did when

they emer g ed from the melted state in which
’
they existed in the early days of the world s
“ ”
history And this
. tendency that caused
them to solidify and assume certain crystal
,

forms and whi ch must have existed potentially

,

throu gh the melted state what of that what

—
,
“ ”
is this tendency or force The defin ition .

“
answers the in h e r e n t p owe rs of coh e siv e at
tr action .

“
So here is Cohesive Attraction that we
, ,

shall consider fully in fo rthcomin g chapters of

“ ”
thi s book Inherent too the definition says
.
, ,
.

“ ”
What is Inherent ? Let us see Webster d e ,
“ ” ”
fines Inherent as permanently existing .

“
So this power of Cohesive Attraction perma
”
n e n tl y existed in the Substance or else in con
n e ction with it Let us take a n other look at
.

Cohesive Attractio n .

54
 LIFE A ND MI ND AM O N G THE AT O MS
Cohesive Attraction is that form of Unive r
sal Attraction that causes the Molecules of a
“
body to draw together that invisible power
—

’
of the Molec ul e by which it draws another
,

Molecule toward itself and itself toward the ,

other the manifestation of which power by sev

,

eral Molecules tends to draw each of them

together ( We shall learn of these particles
.

of Substance called Molecules before lon g ) It .

is a primal cause of Motion this mutual Attra e ,

ti on and drawin g power N ow is it reasonable

,
-
.

“ ”
to suppose that this wonderful power is a
mere blind force ? Is it not more reasonable to
-

think of it as a form of vital action life — -

“ ”
action ? D ead things could not manifest thi s
force and action .

And if this Cohesive Attraction is an evi

dence of Life then all substance must have
,

Life manifestin g through it N ot only the .

rocks but the soil and earth and dirt for they
, ,

are but crumbled rock .

And when we thus consider Substan c e as

, ,
“ ”
bein g the bodv through which Life is Mani
festin g we must not lose si ght of the Mole
,

c ules and Atoms in our consideration of the

,

Mass .A bit of rock ; crystal ; or dirt ; is

but an aggregation of countless Molecules ,

grouped to g ether in certain crystallized shapes

and forms each havin g characteristics of its
,

55
 DYN AMIC THOU G HT
own . These Molecules clin g together in ao ,

c ordan ce wi th their mutual Attractive powers

'

And each of these Molecules is composed of

a number of Atoms whi ch cling together in
,

accordance with Che mi cal Affinity or Chemism ,

— but which is b ut another name for Attraction

,

or Cohesion— and which form a little family ,

called a Molecule And these Atoms are com

.

posed of Corpuscles We will waive the con

.

sideration of the Corpuscle for the moment , ,

but even if we consider it we only carry the ,

subject back a step farther What we wish to .

say co ul d be said even if there were ten fu rther

,

divisions of Substance or a million for that

—
,

matter .

The point we wish you to consider now is ,

that we must separate the Mass into its con

stitue n ts — its Molecules Atoms and even Cor
, ,

p uscl e s in ou r search for the Life in the Min

—

eral and Chemi cal World If there is Life in .

the Mass there must be life in the Molecul e

, ,

Atom or Corpuscle N ow do we fin d it there ?

, .
,

Certainly for the tiniest Atom manif ests its

,

Attractive Power and not onl y does it draw

,

other atoms to itself by virtue thereof but it ,

“
even go e s a step further and shows a prefer ,
” — “ ”
ence a degr ee of li king in its mutual r e
l ation s with other atoms .

We shal l see in future chapte r s th at there is

, ,

56
 LIFE A ND MI ND AMO N G THE ATOMS
” “ ” “ “
desi r e love ,
,
mar riage a n d divor c e ,

amo n g the chemical Atoms We shall consider .

the flir tation s a n d love a ffairs of certain

,
-

Atoms We shall see how an Atom will leave

.

another and fly to a n ew charmer We shall

,
.

’
have many evidences of the Atom s p ow e r to
r e ce iv e s e n sation s, an d to r e sp on d to th e sam e .

“ ”
N othin g dead about this is there ? The Atom ,
“ ”
is very much alive The Attraction ; Affin
.

ity ; and Motions of the Atom give a certain

, ,
“ ”
evidence of something very much like Life ,

as we see it in hi ghe r forms In the Atom .

exists all the Life that causes crystallization

M
.

An d in the Atom lies that which ca u ses For c e

and otion to manifest Verily the Atom .
,

lives and moves and has its being .

And s o our j ourn ey is ended— we have

,

traced Life to its last stages of manifestations

-
and we have found it there and at each step ,

of the journey But stop we have not com

.
, ,

p l e te d ou r j ourney we have but begun it

— .

“ ” “
Why some of u s may c ry how can we go
, ,
”
back of the Atom or Electron ? ,
The answer
“
is I N T O THE ETHER ! ”

Y es back of the Atom and the Corpuscle

, ,

is said by Scien c e to lie that wonderful para ,

dox ical Somethi ng they call The Universal

—
Ether that Something that Science has co n
side re d the Womb of Matter and Force— Some

57
 DYN AMIC THOUGHT
thing that is di fferent from Anything ever
kn own or dreamed of by Man that Something
—
,

which Science has labored so dili g ently to

“
build up ; and whi ch it has used as an explana
”
tion for so much phenomena but regardin g ,

which of very recent date there has begun to

, ,

grow a distrust and a suspicion owing to the ,

discovery of Radiant Matter and thin g s that ,

followed in its train But notwithstanding

.
,

these shadowy suspicions Science still asserts ,

in belief in the constancy and integrity of The

Ether and it behooves us to investigate that
,

wonderful re gion in which it dwells in order to ,

see whether Life and Mind are also to be found

there We think that in the words of the
.
,
“
street we shall find that they are very much
,
”
there.

And so in later chapters of this book we

, ,

shall consider the Etherial Re gion very fully .

But before doin g s o we had better give Sub

,

stance an d Motion in all their forms a careful

, ,

consideration for a correct understandin g of

,

them is vitally necessary for an intelli g ent con

c e p tion of the ideas underlying the philosophy

to be herein set forth .

at it it k
3

N ow pray do not leave this chapter with the

,

belief that the writer has said that the Par

ticl e s of Inorganic Substance are endowed with
58
 LIFE A ND MI ND AMO N G THE A TOMS
Conscious reasoning powers N othing of the .

kind has been said nothing of the kind is

—

meant The Life and Mind evidenced in the

.

Particles are but the faintest glimmerings .

“ ” “
There i s no sign of consciousnes s or rea
” —
sonin g the Mind exhibited is les s than that
of the plant yes ,
les s than even that of the
,

cell of the plant The Life is evidenced by

.

power to move and the M ind is evidenced by

,

the ability to receive impressions and to r e

sp on d to the same by evidencin g Force and

movement .

“
There i s no evidence of consciousnes s or
”
understandin g in these mental processes .

Consciousness is not an essential attribute of

Life or Mind action In fact but a small part
-
.
,

of even the Mentation of Man i s performed in

the field of consciousness N early all of hi s

.

bodily fun ctions are beneath the field of con

sciou sn e ss— one does not consciously regula te
the beating of his heart ; the circulation of his
blood ; the di g estion and assimilation of his
food ; the tearing down and building up work
- -

of the cells ; the work of the organs etc etc ,

.
,
.

Y es these proces ses are all mental processes

, ,
“ ”
and far from mere mechanical movements ,

or chemical processes as some ima g ine

,
Let .

the spark of Life leave the body and the proc ,

esses stop although all the chemicals are still

,

59
 DYN AMIC THO U GHT
“ ”
there and the mechanical movements might
,

g o on unhindered .

The Particles of Substance have enough Life

and Mind to enable them to move receive and ,

respond to impressions and to exert force in

,

accordance with the Law of Attraction— but

there it stops The Crystals show si gns of
.

something like takin g nourishment but the real ,

takin g of food may be said to commence with

the Monera N ot until very hi gh degrees of Life
.

“ ”
and Mind are attained do creatures be gin
,

to exhi bit Consciousness and that whi ch i s ,

“ ”
called Understandin g is still hi gher in the
scale and not until Man is reached does the
,

faculty of turnin g the mental searchli gh t in

w ard manifest itself These matters are men
.

tion e d here merely to prevent misunderstand

in g and misapprehension .

B ut still do not for g et the Par ticles of Sub

,
—

stance receive impressions and respond thereto

—they act and exert Force and Energy— the y

manifest Life and Mentation .

60
 C HAPTER V .

TH E S T O RY OF S U B S TANCE

A S w e stated in a former chapter there a re

two Aspects of All T hings v iz ( 1 ) Sub
-

,
,

.
,

sta nc e ; ( 2 ) Mind In this and the followin g

.

two chapters we shall consider the fi r st on e ,

“ ”
Substance which Science calls Matter
,
.

Perhaps it woul d be as well to begin b y ask

“
ing ourselves the questio n ! What is Sub
” “
stance ? The answer seems to be ! An ything
that takes up room ; the B ody aspect of Things ;
”
matter occupyin g space etc ,
Some w r iters
.

“
have spoke n of Substance as something
”
tangible that can be felt but thi s de finition
—
,

will not do for there are forms of Substance

,

too fine to be felt An d so perhaps the de fini

.
,
“ ”
tio n The B ody of Thin gs i s as good a ,

definitio n as any taken in connectio n with the

,
“ ”
thought that it takes up room .

Science divides Substance ( whi ch it calls

M
”
Matter ) in to four general classes viz ! ( 1 ) ,
.

Solid atte r which is Substance the parts of

, ,

which c losel y adhere and resist impression ,

61
 DYN A MI C TH O UGHT
such as stone wood flesh etc the degrees of
, , ,
.
,

solidity varyin g g reatly and sometimes shadi n g

M
,

into the next clas s which is called ,

2 L
( ) iq uid atte r which may be described ,

as Substance the parts of whi ch have a free

,

motion amon g themselves and easily yield to ,

impression such a s water molasses etc the

, , ,
.
,

de g ree of fluidity ran gin g from some liquids

that flow very slowly such as hot pitch up to , ,

others that flow very freely such as water , ,

wine etc the property of fluidity bein g also

M
, .
,

shared by the next higher class which is called ,

( )
3 A e r if or m a tte r which is Substance in ,
“ ”
the form of elastic fluid such as air gas

M
, , ,

vapor etc ; and

,
.

( )
4 R a d i a n t at te r which is of recent rec ,

ogn ition and which is an ultra g aseous form of

,
-

Substance utterly unlike anythin g ever before

,

known consistin g of the tiniest particl es of

,
“ ”
corpuscles of Substance fin er and more
subtle than the rarest form of atomic substance
kn own to Science .

The three cl asses are well represented by ( 1 )

Earth ( solid ) ; ( 2 ) Water ( liqui d ) ; ( 3 ) Air
( aeriform ) ; ( 4 ) The Corpuscles or Electrons ,

or pa r ticles of electrified substance first no ticed ,

in connection wi th the X Rays Radium etc , ,

.

But it must be remembered that these fou r

classes of Substance are not fixed or p erma n e n t
62
 THE STOR Y OF S UBSTA N CE
-
on the contra ry they are changeable either
under pressure when subjected to heat or
, ,

under the influence of electricity, etc In fact .

“ ”
the word condition is more applicable than
“ ”
the term class The condition or class of a
.

particle of Substance may be changed into an

other class or condition by the application of
the agencies above named The same substance .

may exist in two or three classes under differ ,

ent circ umstances Solids may be changed

.

in to liquids and liquids into g ases and v ice

, ,

v e r sa Metals may be melted then changed

.
,

in to gas accordin g to the degree of heat ap

, ,

plied Liquids may be changed into vapor by

.

the application of heat or in to solids by the

,

withdrawal of heat .

For an example we may turn to Water which ,

is a solid in the condition of ice ; a liqui d in the

condition of water ; and steam in the condition
of vapor ! uicksilver is a metal which i s in a
.

liquid condition in our ordinary temperature ,

but which becomes a solid when subjected to a

very low degre of temperature and may be ,

transformed into a gas un der a high degree of

,

heat Air 1 s a vapor in our ordinary tempera

.

“
ture but has been transforme d into liquid
,
”
air under tremendous pressure whi ch pro ,

duce d a very low de g ree of temperature and , ,

theoretically, it may be tra n sfo rm e d in to a

63
 DYN A M IC THOU GHT
solid un de r a sufficiently low de gree of tem
p e r atu r e althou,
g h so far Science has ,
n ot b e en
able to produce a degr ee of cold sufficient to
“ ”
freeze the liquid air It is all a matter of
.

” “ ” ”
freeze ,
melt and ,
evaporate in all ,

fo rms of Substance and any substance at

—
,

least theoretically is capable of being sub

,

j e c te d to any of the three con di tions just named ,

and bein g manifested in the respective c ondi

tions of Solid Liquid and Aerifo rm
, , , .

T hi s may actually be accompl ished with the

majority of substances at thi s time although ,

in some instances we are not able to p r oduce a

“
sufficiently hi gh temperature to melt and
”
evaporate certain solid substances on the on e ,

hand or a s ufficiently low degree of tempera

,
“ ” “ ”
ture to liqui fy or freeze s olid certain
vapors But the intense heat of the centre of
.

the earth is able to melt rocks and show them ,

as liqui d lava flowin g from volcanoes and Sci ,

en c e teaches that the solid Substance of the

E arth and othe r planets suns etc existed in
, , ,
.
,

the shape of a vapor at one time and would ,

again t ake on that condition in c ase of a col

l ision with another g reat body which convert
‘

motion into intense heat that would first melt ,

and then vaporize every solid particle of which

the earth is composed .

’
If the sun s heat we r e c ompl e tely to die ou t ,

64
 TH E STORY OF S UB STA N CE .

the c old would be so inten se that the air aro un d

the earth a n d all the gases and vapors wo ul d
, ,
“
be f r ozen to solids In physics the term gas
.

is generally applied to a substance that is aeri

form in our ordin ary temperature bu t which ,

may be li quefied in a low temperature ; the te rm

“ ”
vapor being generall y applied to the aeri
form condition of substances that a r e solid or
l iquid in our ordinary temperatures but which ,
“ ”
may be evaporated by heat and thus trans ,
-

formed into an aeriform condition r esuming ,

their original form upon cooling These terms .

,

however are technical a n d practically the r e

, ,

is no difl e re n ce between a gas and a vapo r .

In the above statements regardin g the pos

sibil ity of the transformation of each of the

several forms of Substance into other forms , ,

the reference has bee n applied onl y to the three

better known forms i e S olid Li quid a n d
, . .
, ,

Aeriform The fourth form or state of Sub

.

stance known as Ra di ant Matter is of too re

, ,

cent discovery to admit of its properties bein g

accurately observed Th e best and latest opin
.

ion of Science however is that it constitutes

, ,
“ ”—
what ma y be c alled Primal Matter that is
substa nc e from which all other forms states , ,

kinds a n d varieties of Substance arise the —

“ ”
stu ff from which they are manuf actu red .

Science se e ms to be disca r din g the Ether the

65
 DYNAMIC THOUGHT
c ry of the O rigin of Matt e r in favor of thi s ,
“ ”
P r imal Matter .

Physical Science di vides Substance in to

Masses Molecules and Atoms that is the ol d
,
—
, ,

Physical Science did but the late r investi g ators

,

now see that even the Atom may be sub divided -

But the ol d te rms may as well be used at least ,

for the time being Let us conside r these

M
.

divisions .

“
A ass is a quantity of Substance co n
sid e r e d as a whole — but which is composed of
a collection or combination of parts ( mole
cul es ) A lump of coal ; a piece of iron ; a por
.

tion of meat even a drop of water is a Mass

, ,
.

The only requisite for a Mass i s that it con ,

tai n s two or more parts or molecul es There .

fore a Mass is a collection or combination of

A “
M
two or more molecules considered as a whole
ol e cu l e
”
,

is the p hysical unit of Sub

stance or in other words the smallest part of
, , ,
.

any kind of Substance that can exist by itself

“ ”
and still remain that particular kind of sub
stance ( But not the smallest chemical part
.

the latte r is called an Atom and Atoms com ,

bine to fo rm a Molecule ) The Molecule exists .

as a unit and cannot be split or separated by

,

physical means although it ma y be separated

,

into Atoms by c hemi cal means In orde r that .

we ma y fo rm a clear idea of th e Mole c ul e le t ,

66
 THE STOR Y OF SUBSTA N C E
us take a ve ry small Mass of Matter drop — a

of water for ins tance

,
T his drop of water is
.

a M ass c omposed of a great n umbe r of mol e

c ules It ma y be divided and s ub divided into
.
,
-

smaller and still smaller parts T hi s divisio n .

may b e carried on un til it reaches a poi n t where

our sight and instruments a r e un able to make

a further sub division-

.

B ut theoretically the work ma y be c a r ried

, ,

on still further until at last a limit is reached

,

where we are un able to divide the water into

any smaller parts witho u t separating its chem
,

ical constituents from each other in which lat ,

te r case there woul d be no water at all its ,

c hemical constituents ( or Atoms ) having sepa

rated and now appearing as two atoms of Hy
drogen and one atom of O xygen separated and ,

apart and n o longer forming a molec ule of

water .

Well thi s smallest possible part of water ( or

,

any other form of Substance ) is a Molecule .

Remembe r the Molec ule is the smallest part of

that kind of Substan c e that can be p r oduced
by divi sion and s ub division witho u t dest r o y
-

,
“ ”
ing the kind of the Substance It is the .

smallest part of any kind of Substan c e that ca n

“ ’
exist b y itself and maintain its kin d
, .

In order that you ma y grasp the mi n utenes s

of the Mo l e cule we may me n tio n that S c ie nc e
,

67
 DYN AMIC THO U GHT
claims that no molecule even the largest 18 of
, ,

s ufficient ma gnitude to be seen under eve n the

strongest micros c ope It has bee n calc ulated
.

that if a drop of water as large as a pea were

magnified to the size of the Earth the m ol e ,

cules would then appear no lar g er tha n the

o riginal drop The space between the mole
.

cul es is believed to be considerably la rge r tha n

the molecules themselves .

The figures that are necessa ry to use in co n

n e ction with molecular Substance are likely to .

stagger the ima gination Besides speaking of

.

the molecules of inorganic Substance it may ,

’
be interesting to note that a spide r s th r ead
is so fin e that a piece of it l ar g e enough to
circle the earth would weigh only half a poun d .

And yet each thread is composed of six thou

sand filaments And each of these min ute fil a
.

ments may be divided into tiny bits and each ,

bit will still be a Mass of Substance containing

thousands of molecules and their constituen t
chemical atoms There are livin g microscopic
.
,

creatures so small that five millions of them

,

mi ght be crowded into a space the size of a p m

head An d yet ea ch of them have organs An d
. .

in these organs fluids circulate Try to figure .

out the size of the molecules of the fluids c i r

“

cul atin g i n these tiny orga n s n ot to sp e a k of

,

the c he mi c al atoms .

68
 TH E STORY O F S UB S T A N CE
Wh en y o u handl e a coin a n i nfin itesimal ,

portion of it is wo rn ofi ca n y o u figure the

—

size of the molec ules composing that pa r t ?

Whe n a r ose throws off its pe rfume it emanates ,

tiny particles of itself can yo u meas u re or

—

weigh the molec ules composing that odor ? The

huma n mind is compelled to realize its finite
ness when it considers these thin gs b u t we —

have only just begun to conside r the smalln ess

of Things .

“
An Atom is the che m ical un it of Substance
— that is the smal l est chemical part that ca n
,

e n te r into combinatio n It has been c onside r ed

.

in divisible that is i n capable of furthe r sub

—
,

divisio n That is it has been so c onsidered

.
, ,

un til ve ry r e c entl y b u t the latest discoveries

,

have exp l oded this idea a n d have shown the

,

Atom is composed of c ertain othe r Thi n gs as ,

we shall see a l ittle l ate r on Still we may use .

the Atom as a ve ry good un it of measurement ,

fo r it still r ep r esents the unit of che m ical Sub

stance just as the molecule is the un it of
,

p yh s ica l Substa nc e I n .order that y ou may

un de r sta n d th e di ff e r e nc e b etwee n Mole c ules
a n d Atoms ph y si c a l un its and c hemical un its
—
, ,

l et u s give y o u a few ex ampl es .

Take a mole cul e of wate r th e p hysical un it

—
,

you r ememb er When it is c hemically sepa

.

r ated or an alyze d it is foun d to c ontain two

,

69
 DYN AMIC TH O U G HT
atoms of hyd r ogen and one atom of o xygen
,

both chemical units r emember which when

,
—

united a nd combined fo rm water but which

, ,

when sepa r ated are simple atoms of c ertai n

chemical gases The proportion i n wate r is
.

always the same two of hydrogen a n d on e of

,

oxygen this is the only partnership that will

—

form water T he molecule of table salt co n

.

tains one atom of sodi um and on e of chlorine .

The molecule of air contains five chemical

gases of whi ch nitrogen and oxygen are the
,

principal ones the proportion being about

,

th r ee parts of nit r oge n to on e of oxygen Some .

molec ul es are far more complex fo r in stanc e ,

the molecule of sugar is composed of f or ty fiv e -

chemical atoms and sulphuric acid of seven

,
.

An atom i s estimated at on e 2 50 000 000th of an -

, ,

in ch in diameter .

B u t thi s is n ot all The old theory of the

.

finality and ultimateness of the Atom has been

,

shattered by the recent discove ries of Science .

The atom of Hydrogen was formerly c on sid

e red to be the refin ement of Substance— the
—
Ultimate Atom the smallest a n d finest Atom
p ossib e or kn own th e last thi n g that c ould be
l —

imagin ed abo u t Substanc e Some eve n wen t .

s o fa r as to de cl a r e that the Atom of H y dr og en

was th e Ul timate Elemen t that is the El emen t

,

out of whi c h al l other atoms we r e made— the

70
 THE STOR Y OF S UBSTA N CE
mothe r of Atoms— the O rigin of Substa n ce It .

was supposed that all other Atoms of Matter

were composed of a varying number of hydro
“
gen Atoms whi ch themselves were vortex
,

rings in the Ether and that analysis could g o-

no further Science rested o n its c ar s, and

.

pronounced the work of a century completed .

But alas ! no sooner was this position

r eached than the discovery of Radiant Matter
,
“
and the formulation of the Corp uscl e The
”
ory brought down the whole theoretical struc
ture and Science was compelled to take up the
,

hunt again and to probe further into the inne r

,

recesses of Thin g s for the Ultimate Thin g .

But nevertheless Atoms still exist although

, , ,

their finality i s no longer urged The facts r e .

main althou gh the theory has fallen

,
.

Let us see about this latest theory—L the Cor -

p u sc l e or Electron Theo ry The di scovery of .

Radiant Matter and the investigation of the ,

late discovery of Radium has led to the fur ,

the r discovery that each Atom instead of being ,

“ ”
a thing in itself is a little mass containing
- -

“ ” “ ”
nume r ous other Things c alled Corpus cles
“ ”
( or Electrons because electrified ) The the
, .

ory is thi s briefly ! That each Atom is a minute

,

mas s of Substance containing a n umber of

“ ”
electrified particles which are known as ,

Electrons in constant motion and vibration r e

, ,

71
 DYN AMIC THO U GHT
volvin g around each other as do the planets
, ,

sun s and moons of the Universe in f act each

,
—

chemi cal Atom is like un to a Univ erse in itself .

T he simplest Atom that which was s upposed

—

“ ”—
to be the Ultimate Atom the Atom of Hy
drogen is sup posed to contain within its tiny
—

self no less than minute Corpuscles whi ch ,

“ ”
because electrified a r e called Electron re ,

volvin g i n fix ed and regular orbits within the

containing globe of the Atom The more com .

plex forms of Atoms are supposed to contain a

far g reater number of Electrons the authorities ,

estimatin g those in a n Atom of O xy gen at

tho se in an Atom of Gold and ,

those in an Atom of Radium These ,

“ ”
figures are of course mere scientific guesses
“
but whe n compared with the similar guess
regarding the size of the Atom they give a ,

startling illustration of the size of the newly

discovered Corpuscle o r Electron .

Another authority for an illustration asks

, ,

us to consider a great globe about 100 feet in

diameter that is of course 100 feet through
—
, ,

its centre Let the globe represent the Atom

. .

“ ”
The n imagin e minute specks each the ,

size of a pin point composed of Substance an d

-

, ,

ea c h contain ing as in a c aps ul e an atom of

, ,
“ ”
ele c t ricity Each speck is r evolvi n g aroun d
.

“
ea c h oth er in a r egula r orbit i n that great 100
,

72
 TH E STOR Y O F SUBSTA N C E
”
feet through globe and keeping well awa y
,

from one another That will give y ou an idea

.

of the relative size of the Electrons and Atoms ,

and the room that the fo rmer have to move

about in good ma ny feet between each yo u
—
,

will notice L ots of room and plenty to spa r e

.
,
.

Try to figure out the size of an Electron .

Many readers of the magazin es have been

confused as to the relation between the Cor
p u scl e s and the Electrons ( or Ions as some ,

have called the latter ) The matter is ve ry

.

simple They are both the same The C or

. .

p u scl e is the tiny particle of Matter which b e ,

cause it i s electrified and has thus become the

“ “ ”
unit of electricity is called an Electron
, .

From the viewpoint of Substance we call the

“ ”
tiny particle a Corpuscle from the view -

“ ”
point of Electricity we call it an Electron
,
.

T hese Electrons are the tiny particles that

’
po u r forth from the pole in the Crookes Tube ,
“ ”
and constitute what are known as X Rays ,
“ “
Cathode R ays ,
”
Becquerel Rays etc ,
.

They also are the particles that a r e thrown off

and emitted by Radium and simila r sub ,

stanc es The y exist in the Atom as explained

.
, ,
“
but also are found free and i n dependent ,

and in the l ast condition or state are thrown off

“ ”
in the aforesaid Rays and by Radium et c
, ,
.

So far the Corpuscles are known onl y as

73
 DYN A MIC THOU G HT
c harged wi th Electricity and the Elect r o n o nl y
,

as a tiny charge of Electricity with which the

Corpuscle is charg ed But Science dreams of
.

Corpuscles of Substance other than Electrons ,

in which case the old O ccult teachi ngs of light

“

” “ ”
dust and heat dust et c will be verified, .
, .

The Electron contains a powe rful charge of

Electricity as much in fact as an Atom
, ,

to times its size will ca r ry But Sci .

ence is wonderin g how these hi ghly charged

particles mana g e to hold together in the Atom ,

s o ri gidly coherent as to appear indestructible .

We thi nk that we may get a hint at the matter

a little late r on in thi s book .

Science or at least s om e s c ientists are wo n

, ,
“ ”
derin g whether the whi rl or vibration of the
Corpuscle mi ght n ot produce that which we call
Electricity and whether when this motion
, ,
'

i s intensified waves of Electricity will not be

,

emitted . The w riter fully a g rees with this

idea and fin ds that it fits c losely his own the
,

c ries re g arding Substance and Motion B ut .

the r eader is cautioned against falling into the

error of man y recent popular writers on the
subject some of whom have used terms cal cu
,

lated to convey the idea that the Corpuscle

( Electron ) is Electricity itse lf rathe r than tiny ,

particles of Substan ce called Corpuscl es ,

charged with the unitary charge of Electricity ,

74
 THE STOR Y OF SUBSTA N C E
“ ”
a n d the r efo r e called Electrons B u t for .

that matter Electricity is only known to u s as

,

asso c iated with some form of S ubstance and ,

“ ”
not as a thin g in itself -
We shall se e the
-
.

reaso n for this as we pro c eed with this book .

These Corpuscles are desti n ed to pla y a most

important part in the theories of Science from
n ow on .They al r eady have o v e r tu rned se v
eral ver y ca r efully a n d laborio u s ly erected the
ore tical structu r es— and man y more will fol
l ow among the many important ones evidently
,
“
doomed to the dust heap being the vorte x
-

”
rin g atomic theory and other theories built
,

upon the Etheric origin of Matte r and othe r ,

theo ries co n cerning the Ethe r even to the e x ,

ten t of brea kin g down the theory of The Ethe r

itself which theor y had almost come to be co n
,

side r e d a Law .

We shall further c o n s i de r the Co rp u scles ,

a n d thei r qu alities chara c teri stics etc in th e

, ,
.
,

n e x t chapte r fo r they have a n important bea r

,

i ng upon the theories adv a nc e d in th e c o ur s e of

the st udy of this book .
 CHAPTER VI

S U B S TA N CE AND B EYO ND

CIENCE has ascribed to Substa n ce cer tain

characteristic qualities which it c alls
”
Pr operties It divides these properties into
.

two classes viz , ( ) Molecular Properties

1
( sometimes called Physical Properties ); and
( )
2 Atomic Properties ( sometimes called Chem

M
ical Properties ) .

ol e cul ar P r op e r tie s are those whi ch may be

manifeste d by Substance without disturbin g

the Molecules and consequentl y without a ff ect
,
“ ”
ing the kind of Substance .

Atom ic P r op e r tie s are those whi ch con c e rn

the Atoms when free from Molecular combina
tion and which consequently cannot be mani
,
“ ”
fe ste d without ch anging the kind of Sub
stance .

Scie nc e before long i s likely to add a third

, ,
“
class of P r operties namely , Corp uscul ar
,
”
Pr op e r tie s relating to the Co rpuscles or pa r
,

ticl e s of Radiant Matter but so far it has not , , ,

ha d the Oppo rt uni ty to sufficiently obse rv e these

qu al ities except in a general wa y
,
.

76
 SU B STA N C E A ND BE Y O ND
There are c ertain General Prope rties that
s e em possessed by both Mass Mo l e cul es a n d , ,

Atoms and probably by Corpus cles

— .

These G e n e r al Pr op e r tie s a r e a s follows

Shap e ! That property whereby Substan c e
”
takes up room .Thi s property manifests in
three directions called D imensions of Space
, ,

namely Length B readth and T hi ckness

, , ,
.

We ig ht ! That property whereb y Substance

responds to Gravity Weight is simpl y the
.

measure of the attraction .

I m p e n e tr ability ! That property wh er eby

two bodies of Substance are prevented from
o c cupyin g the same space at the same time .

A nail driven into a piece of wood simpl y ,

pushes aside the molecules and occupies the ,

Space between them Substance i s never

.

“ ”
actually invaded or its actual ter rito ry
occupied b y other Substance
In d e s tructibility ! That property whe r eby
Substance is prevented from being destroyed
or anni hi lated . Although the forms of Sub
stance may be chan g ed or transformed into ,

other forms still Substance in its e lf is not

, ,

destroyed a n d cannot be un de r the existin g

M
,

Laws of the Universe .

obility ! That propert y whereb y Substance

responds to imparted Motion We shall noti c e .

thi s property in our consideration of Motio n .

77
 D YN AMIC THO UG H T
In addition to the Motion of the Mass and the ,

movements of Molecules and Atoms in r e

sp on se to its Attraction there is another form
,

of Motion constantly g oing on without refer

,

ence to the Attraction or impressed Motion of

the Mass . The Molecules of all bodies are
always in a state of rapid Motion called Vibra,

tion In solids this vibration is short bein g

.
,

restrained by the close cohesive position of the

Molecules . But in Liquids the Molec ul es
,

bein g further separated the vibration is far

,

more rapid and they move around and slide

,

over each othe r with comparativel y little re

sistan ce
. In gases and vapors the Molecules
have a splendid field for Motion and oons s ,

quently vibrate in wide fields and orbits and ,

dash around with the gr eatest velocity The .

Atoms also are believed to vibrate rapidly i n ,

accordance with their own laws of vibration .

And the Corpuscles are believed to far excel

the last two mentioned particles in intensity ,

rapidity and complexity of their vibrations as ,

we shall see a little later on in the book Al l .

Substan c e is in constant Motio n and Vib r ation .

There is n o Rest in Substan ce .

I n e r tia ! That property whereby Substanc e

may n ot move unless in r e sponse to imparted
Motio n ; no r terminate its Motion when it is ,

once impa r te d except in respo n se to some

,

78
 SUBSTA N C E A ND BE Y O ND
other manifestatio n of impressed Fo rc e Sci .

“ ” “
ence holds that thi s impressed F orce or im
pa r ted Motio n must come from witho ut but ,
“
th e w rite r ho l ds that Force ma y als o be e x
” “ ”
pressed f r om withi n as ma y be see n b y
,

refere n ce to subsequent chapters of thi s boo k .

Attr action ! That p r operty whereby par

ticl e s or bodies of Substance ( 1 ) draw other
particles or bodies toward themselves ; or ( 2 )
move toward other particles or bodies ; or ( 3 )
are mutually drawn to g ether This property
.

manifests in four forms g enerally referred to

,

as separate and distinct from each other but ,

whi ch the writer believes to be but forms of the

same Attractive Power and whi ch he believes
,

to be a Mental Process at the last a n alysis ( a

,

rev olutionary claim which will be s upported b y

,

argument in later chapters of the book ) These .

three forms of Attraction are known a s ( 1 )

Grav itation ; ( 2 ) Cohesion ; ( 3 ) Adhesion ; and
( ) Che mi cal Affinity or Chemism We a r e
4 , .

invited to consider them briefly at this point, ,

further inv estigation being reserv ed fo r our

chapters on Motion and D ynamic Thought
, .

G r av itation ! This term is usually applied

to the attractio n between Masses of Substance ,

such as the Sun the Earth and Masses of Sub

, ,
’
stance on or about the Earth s surface How .

ever, Newto n, who disco v ered the fa c ts of

79
 DYN A M IC TH O UGHT
Gravitation states the Law as
, ,
Ev e ry p ar
ticl e of m atte r in the Univ e rs e ,
attr acts e v e r y
”
othe r p ar ticl e , e tc .

Cohe sion ! T hi s term is used to indicate the

attraction between Molecules by whi ch they ,

are combined into Masses or Bodies Cohe .

sion causes the Molecules to un ite and cling to

gether thus formin g the Mass
,
.

Adhe sion ! This term is u sed to indicate the

att raction between Masses whi ch causes them
“ ”
to stick to g ether without a cohesion of their
Molec ul es Adhesion operates through the
.

adjacent surfaces of the two Masses It ma y .

“ ”
be considered as a lesser form of cohesion .

‘
Che m ical Afiinity ( sometimes called Chem
ism or Atomic Attraction ) T hi s term is used
to indicate the att r a c tion between the atoms b y ,

which they c ombin e uni te and cling together

, ,

forming the Molec ul e .

Science has before it the task of naming and ,

classifying the att r actio n between the Corpus

,

cles b y which they combine and form the Atom

, .

But whatever the name it will be seen that it ,

“
r epresen ts b u t a n othe r manifestatio n of At
”
traction .

A risin g f r om Mole c ula r Attractio n or Cc ,

“ ”
he sion are sev er al
, P r operties pe culia r to
M asses having Molecul es and r esulting from ,

th e ten dency of the l atte r to re s i st sepa r ati o n .

80
 S UBSTA N CE A ND BE Y O ND

We had better consider them b riefly in o r der to ,

un de r stand the powe r of Mol ec ul a r Att r action ,

a n d its in cidents .

P or osity ! That propert y i n di cating the

distances obse rv ed by the Molec ul es in their
relation to each other whi ch varies i n di fferent
,
“ ”
kinds of Substance Al l Substance is more
.

or les s Porous that is has more or less space

, ,

existing betwee n the Molecul es the degree de

—

“ ”
pends upon the closen e ss Compressibility.

and Expansibility sometimes mentioned as

,
“ ”
properties are but res ults of Porosity
, .

El as ticity ! T hat property whereby bodies

resume their original size and form after hav ,
“ ”
in g been compressed expanded or ,
ben t .

The res ul t is caused by the inclination of the

molec ul es to resume their original positions .

What is sometimes called Plasticity is

“ ”

merely the reverse of Elasticity and de n otes a ,

limited degree of the latter .

Har dn e ss ! That condi tion resulting from

Molecular Attractio n resisting the forcible e n
trance and passage of other Substa nc e b etwee n
the molecules .

Te n acity ! That condition res ul ting from

Molecular Attraction resisting the forcible
pullin g asunder or tearing apart of the Mass
,
.

“
This condition sometimes is c alled Tough
”
n ess
.

81
 M
DYN AMI C THOUGHT
al l e ability ! That condition resultin g from
Molecular Attraction resistin g the forcible
separatio n of the Mass by pounding hammer ,
“ ”
in g or pressure The resistance is passive
.
,

an d c onsists of the Molecules allowing them

selves to assume a spread out fo rmation -

rather than to be forced apart .

D uctility ! That condition resultin g from

Molecular Attraction resisting the forcible
“ ”
separation of the Mass by a drawing out
process The resistance is
. passive and ,

consists of the Molec ul es allo wi ng themselves

to be d r awn out into a forniation of the shape
of wire or thread rather tha n to be p ulled
,

apart .

In any of the above cases we may in te lli

M
,

g ently and with propriety substitute the

M
, ,
“
words ,
ol e cul e s by m e an s of cohe sion r e
, ,
“
sis ting ,
for the terms above used ol ,
”
e cul ar Attraction resistin g etc
, , .

All Masses of Substance ( probably Molec ul es

as well ) are capable of Ex p ansion an d Con trae
tion both phenome n a in fact and in degree
, , , ,

resulting from the r elation of the Molec ul es .

“ ”
Contraction is a crowdin g together of the
“ ”
Molecules ; Expansio n a getting apa rt of
them .

D e n sity ! The amount of Substa nc e in rel a

— “ ”
tior to a given b ulk Volum e th e size or
.

82
 M
SUBSTA N CE A ND BE Y O ND
”
b ulk of a body of S ubstance Be . ass—
“ ”
sides being used to designate a body of Sub
stance composed of two or more Mole c ules the
, ,
“ ” “
term Mass is used to designate the total
”
quantity of Substance in a B ody An ap p l i .

cation of the above terms may be seen in the

following illustration !
A quart of water occupies a certain space
“ ” “
and has a certain volume mass and,
“ ” “
'

density . Convert the same mass of

Water into Steam and it expands to a v ol

,
”
ume of 17 00 times that of Water but as no
—
,
“ ”
molecules have been added the mass r e ,

mains the same but as a quart of Steam

—

wei ghs 17 00 times les s tha n the same v ol

” “ ”
ume of Water the density of Steam is
,

17 00 times less than that of Water As the .

“ ” “ ”
volume of a given mas s increases the ,
”
density decreases in the same proportion
“ ” “
but the mas s remains the same Mas s .

“ ”
therefore has two factors i e Vol ume and
,
. .
,
“ ” “ ” “ ”
D e n sity .The D ensity of a Mass is
“
dete rmin ed b y th e we ight of a ce r tain V ol
”
ume of it

M
.

“
The abo v e co n side r ati o n of the P r ope r
”
ties of Substance dealt only with the ol e c
ular Properties or Physical P r operties as they
, ,

are sometimes called that is with properties

—
,

d e pen ding up o n the existen ce of the Mo le c ule s .

83
 DYN AMIC THOU G HT
When we con sider the Molecules as being com
posed of Atoms and when we co n side r the ,

p r ocesses whereby these Molec ules are buil t up

of or broken down through the separation of
,

Atoms we come to the subject of Atomic P r op

,

e r tie s or Che mi cal Prope r ties

, as the y are ,

ofte n called .

The Atom ic P r op e r tie s of Substan ce consist

prin c ipally in the power and ma nifestatio n of
Motion in the di r ection of combin ation sepa
, ,

ration and the complex motions resulting from

,

the same This Motion is manifested by rea

.

son of Atomi c Attraction sometimes called ,

“ ”
Chemical Affinity whi ch we shall c onside r
,

a little later on in the chapter .

Atomic Principles as above mentio n ed a r e , ,

best ill u strated by a reference to Chemical

changes and we shall n ow examine the same
,
.

An d the better way to conside r Chemical

,

Changes i s by comparing them with Physica l

Chan ges or Changes of the Mole c ules
,
.

Som e Physical Chang e s in Substance a r e

brought about by Heat which tends to sepa r ate ,

the molecules or rather to allow them to sp r ea d

,

out awa y from e ach other so lo n g as the hi gh ,

t empe r at u re is maintained the degr e e of thei r ,

nea rn ess being i nfluenced by temperat ur e .

O the r Phy sical Chan ges are produced b y out

si de Fo rce s sepa r at in g the mo l e cul es to s uch

84
 S UB STA N C E A ND BE Y O ND
a n exte n t to such a distance that thei r cc
— —

he siv e forc e is lost and the Solid matte r is said

,
“ ”
to be broke n or even reduced to d u st
,
.

O ther physical changes are brought about by

Electricity causin g the Molecules to sepa r ate
,

and disinte g rate .

Che m ical Chang e s as distinguished from ,

Physical Changes do not involve or deal with

,

Molecules the action being solel y upon the

,

Atoms of whi ch the Molecules are composed .

P hysical Changes sep arate Molec ules from

each other whi le Che mi cal Changes destroy
,

and break up the Molecul e so that its identity ,

is forever lost its Atoms thereafter either e x

,

istin g free from combinations o r else r e com ,

‘

bini ng with othe r Atoms and fo rming n e w ,

combi n ations Chemical changes are occa

.

sion e d by either physical or chemical agencies .

The physical agencies generally emplo y ed are

heat electricity light pressure percussio n
, , , ,
'
,

etc The principle of Chemical Changes is

.

that the Atoms are possessed of and subject ,

“ ”
to what is called
, Atomic Att r actio n or
“
Chemical Affin ity which may be defined as ,
“ ”
a n attraction or love existing in va rying
degr ees between Atoms This Affinity causes .

Atoms of one element to seek out and all y them

selves to Atoms of another element the elem en t ,

85
 DYN AMIC THOUGHT
“ ”
of choice or preferenc e being st rikin gl y
in evidence .

Atoms of di fferent elements form mar

riage s and c ling to g ether in ha rmony until
, , ,

pe rchance by some physical or chemical

,

agency the Mole c ule is brought i n sufficiently

,

close connection with another Molecule com

posed of difi er e n t elemental atoms when alas ! , ,

on e of Atoms of our Molecul e fin ds that it has

a greate r Affinity for some other elemental

Atom i n the second Molecule and 10 ! it flies ,

away leaving its first partner and seeking the

, ,

new charme r D ivorce and r e marriage is a

.
-

common thing in the world of Atoms in fact -

Chemistry is based upon these qualities .

Physical and Chemical Changes g radual l y

“ ” “
tra n sform solid r ock to earth or soil .

D isintegration b y the action of changes in tem

,

p e r atu r e rains and atmospheric

,
i n fluences and ,

other Physical Chan g es have slowly wo rn ,

“ ”
down the rocks into dirt gravel clay loam , , , ,

etc And D ecomposition by Chemical Change

.

that set the atoms free from thei r c ombinations

has aided in the work .

There is n o r est in the world of Substa nc e .

Eve rythi n g is chan ging c onstantly chan gin g

— .

O ld forms give way to new and these gr own , ,

ol d while being bo rn are in turn replaced by , ,

still newer And on endlessly N othing per

.
,
.

86
 S UBSTA N CE A ND BE Y OND
s ists b u t change An d yet nothing is de
.

stro yed although co un tless forms and shapes

,

ha v e succeeded each other S ubstance is al .

way s there undisturbed and un a ffected by the

,

v arieties of forms it is compelled to undergo .

M asses may change and do change Molecules

— .

may change and do change D isintegration

— .

and decomposition a ffect both and bring to ,

them the death of form But their substan c e .

endu r es in the Atom Atoms may change and.

,

decompose or undergo whatever change that is

,

their fate and still the Corpuscles or what lies

, ,

bey ond the Corpuscles will remain The Atom .

was o n ce r egarded as Eternal but n ow eve n it ,

seems to be capable of dissolving into s ome

fin er division of Substance and perhaps still
—

finer subdivisions await it .

That familiar form of Substance that we call

” “ ” “ ”
earth
, dirt soil etc is but the result
, ,
.
,

of disintegrated r ock which has crumbled and ,

lost its forme r fo rm through the action of ai r ,

water and atmospheri c influen c es And the .

“ ”
rocks themse l ves from which the soil came
, ,

we r e at on e time a sea of melted flowi n g li quid ,

S ubstance somewhat resembling volcanic lava

, .

“ ”
And this melted r ock is thou ght to have been
c ondensed f r om the same prin c iples i n the
shape of vapo r that existed in the ea rl y days
,

of our pla n eta ry system Vapo r gas liquid .

, , ,

87
 DYN AMIC TH O UG H T
“ ”
semi li quid so lid rock
-

,
soi1 the S ubstan c e ,
-

un changed the forms totally unlike Helm

,
.

holtz estimates the density of the neb ul ous v a

pors of Substance as being so rare that it wo ul d
take sev eral millions of cubic miles of it to
wei gh a single grain O h N ature w hat a .
, ,

wizard thou art !

We have spoken of Ai r and Water in a fo r ,

mer chapter and their constituent atoms have

,

been named An d from these three g reat res

.

e rv oir s of Substance— the Earth the Ai r and , ,

the Water are obtained all the material that

—

goes to form the bodies of the animal and v e ge

table kin g doms The plant draws its nourish
.

ment from the soil the air and water and in

, , ,

its wonderful chemi cal laboratory i s able to

transform the elements so drawn from these
“ ”
sources into a substance called Plasm which ,

consists principally of carbon oxygen nitro , ,

gen and hydrogen being nearly identical in

,

composition to the white of an e gg and which ,

constitutes the basis of animal and plant bodily

structures All the material of the physical
.

bodies of men animals and plants are but

, , ,

forms of Plasm The animals and man oh.

, ,

tain their nourishment directly or in di re c tl y , ,

from the plant body and so at the last we are ,

see n to draw from the soil air and wate r all our ,

b odil y n ourishment which we convert into ,

88
 SUBSTA N CE A ND BE Y O ND
bodily structure bone muscle flesh bloo d
, , , , ,

veins tissue cells etc And the chemi c al

, , ,
.

atoms of our bodies are identical with those in

the rock the air the water An d s o y ou see
, ,
.

the un iversality of Substance and its c ountless

forms and appearances .

Chemist ry resolves Substance back into

about seventy fiv e simple substances of which
-

Atoms are the Units which simple sub stances ,

“ ”
are called Elements From these Elements
.

( by their Atoms ) all other substances are

formed by combinations the number of such ,

possible combinations being infinite An Ele .

ment ( in order to be an element ) must be a

“ ”
simple substance that is must be incapable
, ,

of further analysis into some other elements .

T he seventy fiv e elements now recognized by

-

science have never been resolved into other

,

elements by chemical analysis and therefore

, ,
“ ”
are a c cepted as simple But it is true that .
,

other substances that were formerly c on sid

ered as simple elements were afterward de com
posed by electricity and found to consist of
,

two or more simpler substances or elements .

Thus new elements were discovered and ol d ,

“ ”
ones discarded as not elemental And this -
.

fate may be in store for a number of the ele

ments now on the list and man y n ew o n es
—

may be discovered .

9
 DYN A M IC T H O UG HT
For a lo n g time Scie n ce was e n deavo r in g to
t r a c e all elements back to Hydrogen the latter ,
“ ”
being considered the Ultimate Element ,

and its atoms composing all the other atoms ,

under va rying conditions etc But thi s theory ,

.

is now almost abandoned and Science rests on ,

its l ist of seventy fiv e elements the atoms of

-

,
“ ”
which are composed of Electrons S ome .

have hazarded the theory that the Element s

were all forms of Ether ( see next chapte r ) ,

their apparent di fferences resulting merely

from the varying rate of vibration etc And , .
,

in fact such theory was about finally adopted

,

as a workin g hypothesis until the discove ry of

the Corpuscle Everything in Substance now
.

seems to be movin g back to the Corpuscle as ,

we shall see a little further on .

The following is a list of the princ ipal Ele

ments kn own to Science to day
, ,
-

Al umi n um An timony
. .

Arsenic . Bari um .

Bismuth . B oron .

Bromine . Cadmi um .

Calci um . Carbon .

Chlorine . Chromi um .

Cobalt . Copper .

Fluorin e . Gold .

Hyd roge n Iodin e

. .

Ir o n
. Lead .

90
M
S UBSTA N C E A ND B E Y O ND
agn esi um Manga n es e . .

Mercu ry . Ni ckel .

Nitrogen O xygen
. .

Phospho ru s P latin um . .

Potassi um Radium . .

Silico n . Silver .

Sodi um . St r ontium .

Sulphu r . Ti n .

! inc .

O f the above Hyd r ogen is by fa r the lightest

,

in weight ; in fact it is used as a unit of Atomic

“ ”
Wei ght its wei ght being marked 1 o n the
,

scale ; Gold 1 97 Lead 2 07 Silver 108 ; O xy

, , ,

gen 16 ; N itrogen 14 ; Iron 56

, , , .

The di scovery of the Corpuscle or Ele c tron , ,

rudel y shattered the vortex ring theory of the -

origin of the Atom and n ow instead of the , ,

“ ”
Atom being re g arded as a v ortex ring i n -

that hypothetical parado xical absurdity the , ,

Ether it is believed to be composed of a vast

,

number of tiny particles called Co rp u scles as ,

we saw stated in our last chapter These .

“
Corpuscles seem to be the last thi ng in S ub
”
stance its last known state of refin ement
-

and already it is being proclaimed as the long

“ ” “
so ught for Primal Matter or Ul timate ,
”
Substance Whethe r or not a still fin e r state
.

of Substance will be discovered Scie n ce is un

able to say but thinks it unlikely But we , .

91
 DYN AMIC THO UG HT
must not overlook the old O ccult Teaching in di
cating a state of Substance so fin e that it is im
perceptible and only reco gnizable as apparent
,
“ ”
l y free force ; its coverin g or vehicle of Sub ,

stance not bein g evident This would seem to .

indicate a still further refinement of Substance ,

“ ” “
although perhaps the Corpuscle or Elec
” “ ”
tron will answer to fill the bill in the case .

“
As to the Corpuscle bein g Primal Sub
”
stance it must be admitted that its advocates
,

have presented a very stron g case O ne of .

their most important points is that although

Molecules di ffer ve ry materially from each
other accordin g to their kinds ; and whi le
,

Atoms likewi se manifest very plainly their

“
kind the Corpuscle seems to posses s on ly
”
on e kin d ,
no matter from what form or
“ ”
kind of Substance it is thrown off Just .

think what this means It means that the finest

.

particles of Gold Silver Iron Hydrogen O xy

, , , ,

gen and all the rest of the Elements ar e com

, ,

p o s e d o f id e n tical ly th e s am e m ate r ial an d e x ,

“ ”
hibit n o dizfe r e n ce s in kin d The Elements
.

“ ”
are no lon g er Simple Al l Substan ce is On e
.
,

at the l as t an aly sis !

The Corpuscles seem to possess the same

Mass— to carry the same char g e of Electricity
— to act precisely the same irrespective of
—

their source N o di fference m Sl z e mass or

.
,

92
 S UB STA N CE A ND BE Y O ND
character as in the case of the Atom all are
,
—

identical save in the r ate of thei r vibration at

,

the time of observation which is simply a mat ,

te r of more or les s Motion Space seems to be .

flooded with these tiny parti cles these Units

—

of Substance They stream fr om the Sun ; the

.

Stars ; and every body highl y heated Like .

wise they stream from the bodies of highly

electrified Substance G r oups of these Corpus .

cles absolutely identical in nature size mass

, , , ,

etc constitute the Atoms of the S eventy fiv e

.
,
-

“ ”
Elements the kind of Element seemingl y
,

being dependent upon the number and arrange

ment of the Corpuscles and possibly b y thei r ,

rate of vibration Every Atom is like a great

.

bee hive with a swa r m of Corpuscles vibrating

-

moving around each other and upon their own ,

centres An d if b y the action of intense heat

.
, ,

transmitted or caused by interrupted Motion

,

or if by a strong Electric charge — some of these

Corpuscles are detached from the Atoms ( or

possibly an Atom broken up ) they fly off ,

through Space at a marvellous speed of many

thousand miles an hour .

So we see that these wo n derful Co r p u s cl es

l ook ve ry much like Primal Matter or Ultimate
“ ”
Substance the
— Stu ff out of which Sub

stance is made And takin g you back to the

.
,
“
c hapte r on The Universality of Life a nd
93
 DYN A MIC THOUGHT
writer would remind you that in
their Motions and evident Attraction etc these ,
.
,
“ ”
Co rpuscles evidence the same Life and Mind
that we obse rved in the Molec ul es an d Atoms .

It must be so fo r what is in the man uf actured

,

article must be in the material of which the

article is made And so even here Life and
.
, ,

Mind have n ot escaped u s Nor will it in T he

.

Ether !
An d speaking of the Corpuscles as manu ,
”
factur e d articles we are rem inded of He r
,
’
s obel s thought about the Atoms when they ,

we r e re g arded as Primal Matter and likely to

be uniform and at the end of one p rimal sub
, , ,
’
stance Although Herschel s conception does
.

not now apply to the Atoms it may be trans ,

ferred to the Corpuscles .

Herschel thought that the fact that the Par

ticl e s of Substance were likely to be found to be
uniform in size and identical in nature and
,

characteristics indicated that they mi ght be

,
“ ”
akin to manufactured articles turned out ,

from the same gr eat machinery of Creation .

This idea would indicate that the Creator ap

plied the r ules of careful manufacture to the
m an ufacture of the Particles the uniformity ,

operating in the direction of ( 1 ) Economy of

Material ; ( 2 ) Utility through in te rchan ge abil
ity repla c ing b rok en or di s c a r ded parts etc ;
, ,
.

94
 S UBSTA N CE A ND BE Y O N D
and also ( 3 ) Co nfo r mity to a Standa r d of Siz e ,

! uality, etc .

The thought is in te r esting and is mentioned

,

here for that r eason It is n ot a ffected by the

.

suppositio n that there may be a still fin er and

rarer fo rm of Substa n ce f r om whi c h the Parti
,
“ ” —
cles a r e ma nufactu r ed in fact the idea of
,

Hers c hel if c l osel y a n al yzed would seem to i n di

, ,
“ ”
c ate some s uch r aw material f r om whic h the
arti cle s w ere m a nufa c t ure d .

95
 CHAPTER VII

THE PARAD OX or S CIE NCE

N the days of the ancients whe n the p hi
I ,

l osop he r s found themselves unable to ao

count for any particular class of phenomena ,

they bundled it together and referred it to a

“
suppositious Somethin g that they called The
”
Ethe r. Finding this an easy way to get rid
of vex atious questions they fell into the cus
,

tom— and the habit grew upon them Soon .

there were a dozen or more di fferent kind of

Ethers in vo gue each explainin g s omethin g
,
“ ”
else— the somethi n g else by the way bein g
, ,

thin g s that Science n ow fee ls that it under

stands pretty well These Ethers grew to be
.

“ ”
like the va rious Vapors of the ancients a —

“ ’ ”—
dignified term for We don t kn ow a re

sp e ctabl e road for retreat under the semblance

of an advance .

These Ethers became a scientific sca n dal and ,

caused a lax mode of thinking among students

of those times . And so they we r e finally abol
96
 TH E PARA D OX O F SCI E N CE
i ehed and relegated to the s c rap pile of Sc i ence ,

where they l a y for many centuries un til a com

p ar ativ e l y r ecent period when at l east on e of ,

them wa s haul ed forth dusted freshened up a , ,

little and p l ace d up on its ol d pedestal T hi s

,
’
.

“
revamped Ether referred to was the Ether , ,
”
of Aristotle Aristotle as we know was a
.
, ,

famous Greek philosopher wh o lived about 3 50

B C
. . about 2 2 50 years a g o He was a good
-
.

man and a celebrated philosopher but was ,

somewhat deficient in scientific knowledge Al .

thou gh he knew many things and uttered man y ,

wise thoughts he was under the impres sio n that

,

the breath of Man entered the heart in stead of

the l un g s that the back part of the skull was
—

empty and s o on He was without the adv an

,
.

ta g es of a modern training which was n ot his

—

fault however
,
.

Well Aristotle conceiv ed the idea of a n Uni

,

versal Ether which he thought pe rv aded all

,

space and with which he acco un ted fo r the

,

passa g e of light from the s un and stars ; the

movements of the planets and v arious othe r ,

physical phenomena It is not kn own whether .

Aristotle really be lie v e d in thi s Ethe r or ,

whether he merely used it as a spe c ulative

hypothesis following the Ether Habit of his
,

contemporaries At any rate his theo ry served.

,

its p u rpose l ived flourished declined and died

—
, ,

97
 DYN A MIC THOUGHT
-
at least seemed to be dead But its corpse .

was resurrected in modern times and used to ,

account for divers things .

This does not mean that mode rn thi nkers

“ ”
really believe in the Universal Ether they—

merely assume it as a working hypothesis un til

somethin g better is o ffered .

Its principal modern use is to account fo r

the transmission of Li ght from the Sun and
Stars to the Earth It was held that a thing
.

“ ”
could not act where it was not and so it be ,

came necessary to account for the transmission

either by the theory that small particles of sub
stance were thrown off from the Sun and ,

travelled to the Earth or else that there was

,

some medium of communication by means of

vibrations etc N ewton held to the first theory
,
.
,

but his hypothesis went down before the Ether

“ ”
advocates who advanced the wave theory
,
-

,
’
although it seems that like Banquo s ghost
, ,
’
N ewton s theory will not stay down and is now ,

takin g on a new lease of life owin g to the dis ,

c ov e ry of the Corpuscle and Radiant Matter .

The Wave theory philosophers asserted that

-

the Li ght and Heat of the Sun were thrown off

in the shape of Fo rce or Ener gy and trans ,
“ ”
formed into waves in and of a hypothetical
’
Ether ( Aristotle s own ) which waves were car
,

ried to the Earth where meeting S ubstance

, , ,

98
 THE PARA D O X OF SCIE N CE
the y were again t r ansfo rmed into Heat and
Light .

It was kn own tha t Light and Heat travelled

at the rate of miles per second and ,
“ ”
therefore the waves of the Ether were con
side r e d to have that speed The Wave theo ry
.
-

seemed to fit the facts of the case better tha n

the N ewtonian Theory of Corpuscles altho ugh ,

the latter has always been considered as better

explaining certain phenomena than the new
theory And so the Ether Wave became ge n
.

e ral l y accepted and remains so to day although

,
-

recent di scoveries are causing a disturbance i n

the scientific camp re garding the question .

Later it was discovered that the Electricity

travelled at the sam e r ate as Light and Heat
‘

and the VVav e of the Ether theory was thus

—
- -

thought to have additional verification and ,

Electricity came under the Law and remained

there until the Electron discovery whi ch is ,

causing much di sturbance among those inter

,

e ste d i n the study of Electricity .

Briefly stated the theo ry of the Universal

,

Ether is this
That pervading all Space in the Un iverse
not only between planets stars and s un s but
, ,
“ ”
also filling in the cracks between mole c ul es ,

and atoms as well there is a subtle Substan c e

—

in and through which the wa v es of Light H eat , ,

99
 DYN AMIC THOUGHT
Ele c tric i ty and Magnetism travel at the r ate of
per second Thi s Substance is said to
.

“ ”
be Matter that is not Matter in fact Sci -

ence does not venture to say just w hat it i s al ,

though it freely states just what some of its

properties must b e and alas ! these properties
, ,

are most contradictory and opposite to each

other as we shall see as we proceed
, .

Thi s Universal Ether is purely hypothetical .

It has been called a necessity o

“
f Science ’

somethi n g assumed for the purpose of explain

ing or accounting for ce rt ain phenomena It .

i s undemonstrated and unproved in fact may

—
,

truthfully be said to be un demonstrable and nu

provable Some have g one so far as to say
.

that its claimed properties and qualities render

”
it unthinkable as well And yet Science .
,

fin ds itself compelled to assume that the Ether ,

“ ”
or something like it exists or else cease ,

speculating about it It belongs to the realm

.

of pure theory and yet many writers treat it as

, ,

if it w e re a positively demonstrated and proven

fact Let us examine into the nature of Sci
.

’
e n ce s problem and her attempted solution and
, ,

the trouble ar1sm g therefrom .

Li ght travels at the rate of miles a

second Remember that Light and Heat are
.
,

that whi ch we call by those names only when

consid er ed i n conn e ction with Substan ce Ac .

100
 THE PA R A D OX OF SCIE N CE
’
co r di n g to the theory Light in the Sun s at
,

m osp he re is transfo rmed in to a Light wave of -

the Ether on its travels to the earth and only ,

“ ”
when the wave comes in co n tact with the
’
Substance on the earth s body or atmosphere
does it become again transformed in to Light as
we kn ow it In its travels through space it
.

meets with no Substance and has nothing to ,

“ ”—
turn into light consequently Space ( be
tween worlds ) is in a state of absolute darkness .

The same is true of Heat and in ter world Space

,
-

is absolutely cold although passing throu gh it

,

are countless heat waves of great intensity

-

which later on will be transformed into Heat

, ,

when they reach the Substance the earth The ,

.

same is true of Electricity and Magnetism .

Although the Ether as we have seen is a

, ,

purely theoretical substance y et Science has ,

found it reasonable to conclude that it must be

possessed of certain attributes in order to ao
count for certain kn own facts Thus it is said .
,

to be f rictionless else the worlds suns a n d

, ,

plane t s c ould not pass freely through it n or ,

co ul d the li ght and heat waves travel at such a

tremendo u s rate It also is thought to have
.

something like In ertia be c a u se Motion once

,

started in it persists un til stopped ; be cause it is

at a state of rest un til Motio n is impa r ted to it ;
and b e cause it takes a fractio n of tim e to impart
3
101
 DYN AMI C TH O UGHT
motion to it It is thought to be difi e re nt from
.

Substance in any of its known forms for many ,

reasons among such being the fa c t that no

,

known form of Substance could carry vibra

tions throu gh space at the rate of miles
a second And Li ght and Heat waves t r avel at
.

that rate and h ave forms and shapes and

, ,

lengths of their own Light for instance vi .

,

brates on two planes and a li ght wave is some ,

-

thin g like a Greek cross thus having a ,

horizontal and a vertical line or plane of vibra ,

tion An d the Ether cannot be a fluid of any

.

de g ree because a fluid cannot transmit cross

,

vibrations at all An d it cannot be a S olid be .

,

cause a Solid could not stand vibrations at such

a terrific speed and still remain a Solid And ,
.

yet to transmit the two plane li ght waves the

,
-

Ether must have a certain de g ree of Ri gidity ,

else the waves could not travel L ord Kelvin .

estimated this de g ree of Ri gidity as about

19 000 000 000th of the rigidity of the hardest
, , ,

steel So you see Science is compelled to as

.
, ,
“
sume that the Ether is a continuous Friction ,

less medium possessing both Inertia and Ri gid

,
”
ity . Some scient ists have thought it to be a
“ ”
kind of elastic jelly .

O f the Ether Prof O live r Lodge has said ,

.
,

We have to t ry and realize the idea of a per

fe ctly contin uo u s subtle incompressible sub , ,
!

102
 TH E PARAD O X OF SCIE N C E
sta nc e pe rv adin g al l Space and pen et r atin g
, ,

between the mole cul es of o r dinary Matter ,

which are imbedded i n it and connected to on e

,

another b y its means An d we must regard it

.

as the on e un iversal medium b y which all ac

tions betwee n bodies are carried on This .
,

then is its function to act as the transmitter

,
—

of motion and energy .

T o give you an idea of the wonderful thi ng

that Science is compelled to think of the Ether
as being by reason of the qualities it is com
,

pe l l e d to ascribe to it although it confesses

—

“ ”
itself unable to imagin e the nature of the
“ ”
Thing which it has created in bits by the
adding and bestowin g of qualities which were
made necessary by the lo gical requirements of
the case — let us take a hurried view of the
T hi ng as the several departments of Science
say it must be thought of .

T o meet the requirements of the case Science ,

say s that T he Universal Ether must be Sub

stanc e infinitely mo r e rare and evanescent than
the finest gas or vapo r kn own to Science even ,

in its rarest co n dition It must conve y Heat i n

.

the manne r of an infin itely Solid body and yet

—

it must not be a Solid It must be transparent

.

and invisible It must be Frictionless and yet

.
,

Incompressible It cannot be a Fluid It can

. .

not have Attraction for Substance such as all ,

103
 DYN AMIC THOU G H T
Substa n ce has N or can it hav e Weigh that
. t —

is it is not subj ect to Gravitation

,
It is be .

yond the r each of any known scientific in stru

ment e v e n of the g reatest powe r and it r e
, ,

fuses to register itself in any way, either to

senses or instruments .

“ ”
It c annot be known of itself but may o nl y ,
“ ”
be recognized as existent by the thin gs fo r
which it acts as a medium or transmitting agent .

It must co nve y Ener gy and Motion yet it must ,

n ot take up any part of either from the Matter

in its midst It must not absorb any of the
.

Heat Light or Electricity It mu st fil l up the

, .

spaces between the worlds as well as the most ,

mi n ute space between the Molecules Atoms and ,

Corpuscles o r any other minute particle of

,

Substance either kn own by name to Science

,

now or which may be discovered or ima gined

later as a necessity of some conception regard
ing the nature of Substance In short The .
,

Universal Ether in order to do the thin g s at

,

tributed to it must be more solid than Solids ;

,

more Vapor like and Gas like than Vapor or

- -

Gas ; mo r e fluid than Fluids ; infin itely less ri gid

than steel a n d y et infin itely st r onge r than the
,

strongest steel It must be a substan ce having

.

the qualities of a vacuum It must be c ontin .

u ou s and not composed of Pa r ticles Atoms or ,

“ ”
Mole cul es It must be a n
. everythi ng i n
104
 THE PARAD OX OF SCIE N C E
”
some r espects a n d yet a nothing in others
,
.

It must not be S ubstance a n d yet it must carry

,

Substance within its ocean of dimensions and , ,

besides interpenet r ate the most minute spa c e

,

between the particles of S ubstance It must .

n ot be Energy or Force and yet Science has

,
“
been considering Energy and F orce as but in
” “ ”
te r r up tion s of r est o r agitations withi n ,

and of itself
, .

S o y ou see that thi s mysterious wo n de r ful

,
“ ”
Universal Ether in orde r to be at all
—
“ ”
must be a Something possessing certain
qu alities or properties of Substance man y of
—

the properties of qualities being exactly contra

dictory and opposed to each other and y et it
—

cann ot be Substance as we know it It is a .

Paradoxical thi ng It could onl y belong to an

.

other a n d an entirely di fferent order of exist

ence from that of Substance as we know it It .

must possess characteristics and properties of

an order as yet unknown to us b y name for —

which the material world contains n o analogy

for which Substance has n o analogu es It must .

be a far mor ! complex thing than i s even the

most comple x thing we call M atter or that ,

whi ch we call Force or Ene r gy An d yet it

.
,

has bee n claimed that it would explain both

yes c ontain within itself the possibility of both
, .

An d y et in face of what ha s just been said

, ,

105
 DYN AMIC THOUGHT
th e w rite r must confess humbly and with a full
,

realization of the enormity of the o ffence that ,

he supposes advancin g a theory a little further ,

on in this book that will attempt to identify this

Something thi s Un iversal Ether with a

— —

Somethin g else that we know although not ,

through the senses or by means of instruments .

Bear with him kindly he begs of you while he

, ,

proceeds gradually along the path that leads to

the theo ry .

Scientists have compared Substance moving

th r ough the Ether as a coarse se iv e moving
through water the latter making room for the
,

passage of the se iv e and then closing up behind

,

it If this be amended by the idea that the

.

moving se iv e while allowin g the water to pass

,

through it freely still carries alon g with it a

,

thin film of water whi ch clin g s to the wires of

the se iv e by adhesion if there be admitted this
—
“ ”
clingin g film a s well as the body of the water
through which the se iv e moves then the illus
—

tration answers quite well as a crude illustra

“ ”
tion of Substa n ce and The Ethe r This fact .

is impo rtant in view of the theory that will be

advanced further on i n this book Prof
, . .

“
Lod ge in his interesting work Modern Views
, ,
”
of Electricity mentio n s a n umbe r of e x p e ri
,

ments ten din g to p r ove the abo v e m en tio n ed

106
 T HE P ARA D O X OF SCI E N CE
fact which is not so generally known as othe r
,
'
‘
facts r e l atin g to the Ether .

Until the discovery of Radiant Matte r ( brin g

ing wi th it the n ew theories of the Corp u scle or
Elect r on ,
brushed aside into the du st heap
many generally ac c epted scienti fic theories r e
g arding the nature of Substance the favorite ,

and most p opular theor y was what was kn own

“ ”
a s the V o rtex ring theory of the Atom T his
-
.

theory held that the atoms of Substa n ce were

but vortex rings of the Ether having had mo
-

tion communicated to them in some wa y and ,

which afterwards acquired other motions a n d ,

which fin ally become apparent to our senses as

Substance In other words the Atom was sup
.
,

posed to a vortex ring of Ethe r acted upon by

-

Force in some un known way the character

, , ,

nature and properties of the Atom being deter

mined by the shape and size of the vo r te x ring ; -

the rate of motion ; etc etc .

,
.

The new discoveries of Scie n ce howeve r , ,

“
have set aside ( at least temporarily ) this v or
”
tex ring theory and at present Science seems
-

,
“ ”
to fin d its latest thing in Sub stan c e in the ,

theory that Substance at the last seems to

— —

be the Corpuscle or Electron In other words .

,

after many yea r s of fancied security in a set

tl e d theory re g arding the nature of Substance ,

Science once more finds it self compelled to take

1 07
 DYN A MI C TH O UGHT
up the search for the ori gin of things B ut the
.

theory of the Ether remains and is likely to

—

although the names applied to it will change .

By some it is still believed that in the Ether a ,

little further removed rests the origin of Sub

,
“
stance and that the Corpuscle may be the vor
”
tex rin g product instead of the Atom
-

,
.

It will be noticed that Science has made no

serious attempt to co n nect the phenomenon of
Gravitation or Attraction with the Ether .

“ ”
Gravitation stands alone an — outsider
among the F orces responding to none of their
,

flaws — needing no time in which to travel

needin g no medium like the Ether in which to

“ ”—
transmit waves fearing no obstacle or in
te rfe r in g body but passin g ri ght throu gh the
,

same— di fferent di ff erent di fferent And we

, ,
.

shall see why this di fference when we reach the

,

point where our theory brin g s us to the point

“ ”
where we must substitute something else for
that Great Paradoxical General Solvent of
Modern Science the Ether of Aristotle We
— .

shall reach the point after a brief consideration

of Motion Force and Ener gy
, .
 CHAPTER VIII

TH E F ORCE S O F N AT U RE

T HE Substance filling the Universe is i n c o n

stant and un ceasing Motion Motion is .

evidenced in every physical and chemical proc

ess and change and manifested in the constan t
,

interch an g e of position of the Particles of Sub

stance .

There is absolutel y no rest in N ature every

—

thing is constantly changing moving and vi

— —

bratin g Building up processes are ever at

.
-

work forming lar g er masses or bodies of the

Particles and tearing down processes disin
— -

te gration and decomposition of Molecules and

Atoms a n d Corpuscles are constantly at work
, ,

also N ature maintains a constant bala n ce

.

among her Forces If the building up energies

.
-

and forces were allowed full swa y then all the

,
’

Particles in the Universe ultimately would

gravitate to a common centre thus forming a
,

compact and solid Mass whi ch would thus dwell

,

for Eternity unles s the Creative Power should

,

mov e upon it and again scatter its P articles in

109
 DYN AMIC TH O UGHT
all directions And if the tearing down and
.
,
-

dispersive forces and energies were al lowed

full sway the Particles would fly apart and
,

would remain as under for Eternity unless ,

called together by some new Creative fiat .

But N ature pits on e force aga inst another ,

maintainin g a n equilibrium The result is con .

stant play and inter play of forces causin g dis

-

tribution and redistribution of Particles fol

, ,

l owin g the gathering to g ether and building up - -

processes .

There is no lost motion or waste force O ne ,

.

form of force and motion is converted into an

other and so on and on N othin g is lost all
, ,
— .

fo rce is conserved as we shall see as we p r o

,

ce e d
.

In the public mind or rather in the mind of—

,

that part of the public whi ch think of the matter

“ ”
at all there seems to be an idea that Force
—

is somethin g of the nature of an entity separate ,

from Substance or Mind s omethin g that

—

pounces down upon Substance and drives it

along by presence from without The ancient .

philosophers re garded Substance as acted upon

from withou t by a n entity call e d Force Sub ,

stance bein g re g arded as absolutely inert and

“ ”
dead Thi s idea which i s still held by the
.
,

average person owing doubtless to the sur

, , ,

v iv al of old forms of expression w as genera l l y ,

1 10
 T H E F O RCES OF N A TUR E
he l d by philosophers un til the time of D escartes
and N ewton This ol d idea was due to the
.

teachings of Aristotle he of the Ether T heory

—

and Science and Philosophy were timid about

sha king off the Arist otelian dogmas O thers .

h e ld that Light Heat and Electricity were

,
‘fl uids ”
conveyed from bo dy to body in fact -

the general public still entertain s this idea r e

garding Electricity owing to the use of th e term
,
“ ”
the Electric fluid .

The present teachin g of Science is that Force

is the result of the motion of the Particles of !

Substance and of course originates from

, , ,

w ithin rather than from without

,
It is tr ue .

that Motion may be communicated to a body b y

means of another body in Motion imparting the
same to it but that does not alter the case fo r
, ,
-

the O riginal Motion came from the moveme n t

and vibration of the Particles of Substance al ,

though it may have passed through many stages

of transformation change and transmi ssion in
,

its progress The only exception to the rule is

.

Gravitation which is a form of Fo r ce the na

, ,

ture of whi c h is unknown to Science although ,

its laws of operation etc are understood We, .

, .

shall lea rn some new facts about Gravitatio n

in the fo r thcoming chapters of this book .

It will be well for us to remembe r this fa c t i n ,

our c o n side r ation of Force and Motio n— t hat

111
 DYN AMI C TH O UGHT
Fo r ce and Motion origin ate from the inherent
property of Motion passed by the Particles of
Substance and come from within not from
, ,

without This is the best teaching of Modern

.

Science and also forms an important part of

, ,

the Theory of D ynamic Thought which is ad

v an ce d in thi s book
“
For ce an d atte r M
,
Buchner the author of
.

vi gorously insists upon

,

this conception sayin g among many other simi ,

,

lar expressions Force may be defined as a

condition of activity or a motion of matter or ,

of the minutest particles of matter or a capacity

”
thereof .

“
The te rm Force is generally defined in
“
works on Physics as That whi ch causes ,
”
changes or terminates Motion The word .

“ ” “
Force is generally used in the sense of in
” “ ”
action while Ener gy is usually used in the
,
“
sense of Potential Forc e — capacity for per
”
forming work the idea being that it is
,
“ ” “ ”
stored up force or force awaiting use
-

, .

“ ”
The term Power is used i n two senses the ,
“
first meaning a measure of Mechanical En
” “ ”
e rgy , such as a forty horse powe r e n gi ne -

,
“
etc ; the second sen se b eing Capacit y or Abil
.

“
i ty to Ac t o r ex e rci se Force
, this u se being ,
“ ”
almost i den ti c al to the idea of Ene r gy as ,

above described al though possi bl y a l ittl e

, , ,

stronge r exp r ess i on .

1 12
 THE F O RCES OF N A TURE
The Materialistic school holds that Forc e is
a p r operty of Matter the latter being regarded
,

as the r eal thing of the Universe O thers

“ ”
.

“ ”
hold that Force is the r eal thin g and that ,

what is called Matter or Substance is but a , ,

centre of Force etc O thers hold that the two

,
.

are but aspects of the same thing call ing the ,

“ ” “
thing by the name Matter F orce or -

,
”
Force Matte r
-
Haeckel calls thi s combined
.

” “ ”
thing by the name of Sub stance claiming ,

that what a r e called Matter and Force are but

“ ” “ ”
attributes of it the thi rd attribute bei n g
,

Sensation whi ch he holds is a kin to Mind

,
’ ”
Haeckel s Substance is held to be Eternal ,

and Self existent its own Cause in fact ( In

- —
, .

“ ”
this book the term Substance is not used i n
thi s sense but merely as synonymo u s with what
,

Science usually calls

The views advanced in thi s book di ffe r mate
rial l y from any of those above mentioned it ,
“
being held by the write r that All Fo rc e is
”
Vital Mental
-
Force and consequently
, , ,
“ ”
Force as a separate thin g is considered an
unreasonable proposition what i s called
—
“ ”
Force bein g considered merel y a n action of
Mind upon Substance causing Motion The ,
.

writer does not intend to advance this idea at

thi s poin t beyond the mere mentioning of the
fact the theory being brought out a n d de v el
—

1 13
 D Y N A M IC THO UGH T
O ped as we proceed and he will proceed to a
—

consideration Of the phen omena of Fo r ce alo n g ,

the l ines of Mode rn Scien ce believi ng that i n ,

this way the s ubj ect ma y be bette r un derstood .

“ ”
T he te rm Motion as u sed in P hy sics is
, ,
“
defin ed as ! The act process or state Of,

changin g pl a ce or position ; movemen t

( Webster ) SO y ou see Motion is the move
.
,

ment of Substance chan ging place or positio n ;

Force is that which causes changes or te rmi ,
“ ”
n ates Motio n ; and Ene rgy is the c apacity
for ma nifesti n g Force ; and Powe r th e Ability
to Act In works on Physics you will noti ce
.

“ ”
the exp r ession Potential E ne rgy
,
mea n in g ,
“
Ene rgy awaiting action ; als o Kineti c Eu
e rgy,
mean ing Energy i n Actio n ; that is in ,

Motion We shall n ot need these terms in this

.

book but it is well to understand them

, .

“
An othe r te rm frequently met with is Con ,
”
se rv atio n Of Ene r gy which is u sed to indi c ate
,

that Law of Physics the operatio n of which r en

ders Ene r gy indestructible That i s Science .
,

holds that Ene r gy can not be dest r o ye d that —

it is n ot l ost or cr eated but i s m erel y t r a n s

, ,

fo rmed in to othe r fo rms of Energy P oten tia l ,

or K in etic Therefore afte r Ene r gy i s use d it

.
, ,

eithe r pass e s in to a state of Poten tia l E n e r gy

or R e st awaiting a fut ur e c al l to A c ti vi ty or
, ,

el s e is im m e diatel y tran sfo rme d in to a n oth er

1 14
 THE FORC E S OF N AT U R E
fo rm of Kin eti c E n e r gy; o r E n ergy in Actio n .

The theory holds that the qua n tity or amo un t

of E n e r gy i n the Unive r se i s fixe d i n its tota lit y
—n o n e ma y be c r eated or destro y ed— there c an

be n o addition to or subtraction from the Total

,

ity of E n ergy that all Energy u sed has bee n

—

previo u sly stored u p or else has bee n imme

,

diate l y t r ansmitted or transfo rmed It is also .

held that when E n e rgy manifests as the res ult

of work performed it is always fo un d that it is
,

at the expense of some previousl y manifested

form of Energy that the age n c y b y whi ch the
—

work is performed alwa y s parts with its stock

Of Energy and that the thing worked upon al
,

wa y s acquires or gains the amount of Ene rgy

l ost b y the afo r esaid a g ent or worker— and y et ,

the r e is n o a c t ual loss or gain b ut merel y tra n s ,

formation .

The a b o v e theory is mentioned as of i n te r

est in the general subject altho ugh it does n ot ,

play a prominent part i n the subject of this

book for the writer holds that all Energy r e
,

si d es in Mind and emerges therefrom and i n

, , ,

the end r et u rns thereto This being believed

, .
,

it is seen that Energy is n ot to be thought of as

“ ”
a separate thing having a totality but mere ,

ly as a quality of Mind the qu estion of its - n -

totality or fixed quantity not being in quired

in to a l tho ugh both probably r un alo n g th e
, , ,

1 15
 DYN AMI C TH OU GHT
lines Of the nature of Mind and depend upon ,

the limitations or lack of limitations of the

, ,

latter However the question does not assume

.
,

a vital importance in our consideration Of the

subject .

SO far as the question of transmission or ,

transformation of Ener gy is concerned how , ,

ever the principles of the Law of Conservation

,

Of Ener gy may be accepted as correct although ,

it more properly belon g s to the principle O f

“
what has been called The Corelation of
”
Force the idea of which is that one form of
,

Energy may be and is always transformed into

, ,

another fo r m and so on and on unto infinity

, , ,
.

This idea is followed in this book except that ,

“
the idea O f From Mind ori ginally to Mind ,
”
finally is incorporated within it This law of
,
.

“ ”
the Corelation of Force may be illustrate d
by the followin g quotation from Tyndall the ,

great scientist of the last century who says ,

“
A river in descending from an elevation of
,

7 7 2 0 feet g enerates an amount O f heat com

,

petent to au gment its own temperature 10 de

grees F and this amount of h eat w as ab
.
,

str acte d from the sun in order to lift the matte r

,

Of the river to the elevation from which it falls .

As long as the river continues on the hei ghts ,

whether in the solid form as a glacier or in the ,

li quid form as a lake the heat expende d b y the

,

1 16
 THE FORCES OF N ATURE

sun in l ifting it has disappeared from the un i

verse It has been consumed in the act Of lift
.

ing But at the moment that the river starts

.
,

up On its downward course and encounters the ,

resistance of its bed the heat expanded in its

,

elevation begins to be restored The mental .

eye in deed can follow the emission from its

, ,

source through the ether as vibratory motion

, ,

to the ocean where it ceases to be vibration

, ,

and takes the potential form among the mol e ”

cules of aqueous vapor ; to the mountain top -

where the heat absorbed i n vaporizatio n is

given out in condensation while that expended ,

by the sun in lif ting the water to its present

elevation is still unrestored This we fin d p aid .

back to the last unit by the friction along the

’
river s bed ; at the bottom of the cascade where ,

the pl unge of the torrent is suddenl y arrested ;

in the warmth of the machinery tu rn ed b y the
river ; in the spark from the mil l stone ; be n eath
the crusher of the mine r ; in the Alpine saw
mill ; in the milk churn of the chalet ; in the sup
-

ports O f the cradle in which the moun tai n eer ,

by water power rocks his baby to sleep All

-

, .

the forms of mechanical motion here indicated

are simply the parcelling out of an amount Of
calorific motion derived originall y from the
sun ; an d at each point at which the mecha n ical
,

1 17
 D YN A M IC THO UG HT
motion is dest r oyed or diminish ed it is the ,
’ ”
s un s heat which is r estored .

The following quotation also is i n te r estin g

, ,

as ill u strating an other phase of this law

“
The work pe rformed by men and other ani
mals is due to the transformed energy of food .

This food is of vegetable ori gin and owes its

energy to the solar rays The energy of men
.

and animals is therefore the transformed e n

, ,

e rgy of the s un E xcepting the energy of the

.

’
tides the s un s rays a r e the sou rc e of all the
,

forms of energy practicall y available It has .

been estimated that the heat re c eived b y the

earth from the sun each year would melt a la yer
of ice over the entire globe a hun dred feet in
thickness This represents energy equal to one
.

horse power for each fifty square feet of sur

-

’—
face. Anthony and Brackett .

From the above quotations it will be se en ,

that the principal and most familiar so urc es ( or

g reat storage batte ries ) of Energy apparent to ,

dwellers u pon this planet are ( 1 ) the Earth,

manifesting the Power Of Gravitation ; and ( 2 )

’
the Sun manifesting solar heat In Tyndall s
, .

’
illust r ation we see the force of the sun s Energy
— heat — raising the wate r from the o c ean by
,
’
evaporation ( although aided b y the earth s
“ ”
g ravitation p ul l ing down the heavier ai r al ,

lowing the vapo r to ri se ) Then we see the .

118
 TH E FOR CES OF N ATURE
Fo rc e of Gr avitatio n causes the co n de n se d v a
p o r to fa ll as r ai n or snow on the mo un tai n top
-

— the n c a u sin g the r ai n to run in to littl e

st re ams and s o on un til the rive r is r ea c hed

,

th en c ausing the r ive r to sta r t on its do wnward

j ou rn e y of over seven thousan d fee t the n —

causin g it to pl un ge ove r the c ascade ; to t urn

the wheels that operated the machi n e ry a n d ,

turned the mil l stone and the c r ushe r of the

,

min e r a n d the saw m ill and the milk churn and

, ,
-

the cradle An d as T yndall might have added

.
, ,

had he l iv e d a little later in the running of the

—

d ynamo wh ic h r unning p r oduced electricity

, , ,

that i n t urn ca u sed lights to b u rn ; othe r ma

c hine ry to run and manufacture things ; stoves
to cook ; flat irons to iro n ; automobiles and e n

M
-

gin es to run ; and many othe r thi ngs a l ong the

l in e s of t r a n smittin g E n ergy Fo rce and O
,

tion .

An d i n thi s co n side r ation l et us n ot fo rget ,

the impo r tant part that Gravi tatio n that most —

f
wo n de rf ul o all Fo r ces play s in the grand
—

s c he me of Nature N ot only does this Fo rc e

.

c a u se th e p l a n ets to c i r cl e aro un d the sun a n d , ,

pe rhaps that sun a r o un d a n othe r sun and so ,

on a n d on un ti l the matte r b e c omes un think

,

—
able mot o nl y this b u t it p e rfo rms a million
,

parts in the a ffai r of earthly Matte r as we shall ,

se e i n a late r chapte r The Fo rc e Of Gravita

.

119
 DYN AMIC THOU G HT
tio n is one of the greatest mysteries c o nfronting
Science to day althou gh many believe it a sim
-

ple question Gravitation and the Universal

.

Ether contain the great secrets of N ature that

“
Man is striv in g to unveil And yet so com .
,

mon is Gravitation that th e race in cluding al

”
,
“
most all the scientists take it as a matter of
,
”
course . We shall devote much attention to
the question of Gravitation in the forthcoming
chapters of this book for it plays a very impor
,

tant part in the g eneral theory Of D ynamic

Thought upon whi ch this book is based We
, .

shall have a special chapter devoted to it a ,

little later on and the matter will also come u p

,

for explanation further on in the boo k .

But in the meantime let us consider the

, ,

other forms of E n er gy v ia Heat Li ght Mag

, , , ,

n e tism and El e ctricity whi ch with Gravitation

,

and Attractio n Of othe r kin ds form the Forces ,

Of N atu r e .

12 0
 CHAP TER I X

RADIAN T E N ERGY
“ ”
HE kin ds of Energy a re v e ry f e w, al
though the methods O f using applying and ,

manifesting same are innumerable Let u s .

begin with on e of the best kn own forms Of En

e r gy namely Heat
, ,
.

He at was formerly regarded as a very fin e

“ ”
fluid or substance called caloric whi c h was
, ,

supposed to enter into Substance and then

“ ”
manifest the phenomenon Of heat T his .

idea has long since been rele gated to the scrap

pile of Science The present theory whi ch is
.
,

supported b y a mas s of evidence Obtained

through investigation and experimentation is ,

that Heat is a form of Energy arising from the ,

vib r ato ry motions of the Particles of Substance

— a “ Mode of Motion ” The degrees of Heat
.

“ ’
a r e te rmed Temperat u re Temperature de
.

pends upo n the rate of the heat vibrations of -

the Particle s of Substance eithe r arising f r om

,

the O ri ginal Motion of the Particles or else ,

from vibrations or Motion aroused in them b y

12 1
 DYNAMIC THO UG HT
t ran smi ss i o n from Particles of oth er b odie s of
“
S ubstance— these vibratio n s being conta
“
g io u.s
”
Temperatu r e the n means the meas
ur e of the vibrations of the Particles .

Al l bodies Of Substance have s om e degr ee of

Temperature some degree of heat vibration
— -

“
of i ts Particles Science has a pleasant seie n
.

”
tific frictio n of a n Absolute ! ero at the degree
of 491 below ! ero Fahrenheit but thi s is merely
, ,

a n ima gina ry somethin g with which the gr own

u p chi ldre n of Scie nc e a m use themselves .

When two bodies are bro ught n ea r each oth er

— the “ ”
nea rn es s being compa r ative and i n , ,

some c ases meaning a distan c e of millio n s of

,

miles Heat is transmitted from the wa rme r to

—

the cooler body until the temperatu r es are

,

c q ual iz e d— that is un til the two bodies v ib r ate

in uniso n .

In P hysics w e a r e taught that the T r an s mi s

”
sio n of Heat may be accomplished in th r ee
wa y s although the writer is of the opi nio n that
,

the th r e e wa y s are but three fo rms of on e wa y .

”
The first form is called Conduction whereby ,

the vibration or Heat is conveyed along a body

, ,

of Substance from its warme r to its c ooler

,

parts for i n stan c e an i r o n pok e r with one en d

—
,
“
i n the fire The se c ond form is c alled Con
.

”
vection whereb y the visibl e motion of h e ated
,

Sub stanc e moving a l ong the air fo r in stan ce

,
—
,

12 2
 RAD IA N T E N E R GY .

hot ai r,
-
hot wate r, stea m, etc , ei ther by me a n s
-
.

of pipes , or b y allowing them to pass f re el y

th r ough th e ai r Th e thi rd fo rm is c a lled
.

“ ”
Radiatio n whe r eb y the v ib r atio n s a re be
,
“
l ie v e d to be t r ansformed i n to wav e s of the
Ethe r ,
which will be spoke n of l ate r , in ad
dition to what has been said on the s ubj ect in
’
our chapte r entitled The Pa r ado x of S c ience .

The w r ite r thinks that a l ittl e consideratio n

will show us that the same ru l e Ope r at e s i n a ll
“ ”
Of the abov e cases and that Co n d uc tio n a n d
,
“
Co nve c tio n a r e b u t fo rms of R adiatio n For
”
.

in sta nc e in Cond uctio n there m u st be a f ew

,

Parti c les fir st set i n to v ib r atio n the same gr a d ,

n all y passin g on to the oth er s fa r the r a nd ,

“
farthe r awa y P assing how?
. B y c ontact ”
,

r eplies Phy si c s B u t the P a r ti cles a re n ev e r in

‘
.
,

absolut e c o n ta c t ther e alwa y s is plent y of

—
”
space b etwe e n them An d so th e r e m u st be .

“ ”
some kind of wav e s passing th r o ugh th e
space b e tw e e n them whi c h spa ce is n ot filled
,
“ ”
with a ir , or othe r fo rm Of S ub sta nc e bu t ,
“ ”
onl y with the Eth er or s om e thing that takes
,

its p lace . SO t hat afte r a ll Cond uc tio n is but

, ,

a fo rm of Radiation An d the sam e rule will.

appl y in the c ase of Co nv e c tio n .

Heat a ri ses f r om seve ra l c a u s e s all of which , ,

howeve r ma n ifest th r ough the vib r atio n Of th e

,

P a r ticl es of the body evidenc ing th e H e a t T he se .

12 3
 DYN A MI C THO UG HT
ca u s e s may be st ated as ( 1 ) O rigi n al Motio n of
the Pa rticles of a body of Substance arising ,

from some workings of the Law of Attractio n ,

and in cluding Motio n arisin g from Chemical

Action Combustion et c ( 2 ) From transmission
, , .

“ ”
or co n tagion from some other body of Sub
stance the Particles of which are vibrating at

,
,

the rate of Heat ( 3 ) From interrupted O

‘
.

tion includin g friction both Of the movin g body

M
with the ai r or other Substance and the frictio n ,

of a c urr ent of Electricity passin g throu gh the

body In each of the above cases the actual
.
,

and imme di ate cause of the Heat is the vibratio n

of the Pa r ticles of the Substance manifesting
the Heat although the transmitted vib r ato ry
,

waves or the interrupted motion friction c u r

, , ,

rent ,
may have been the instigato r or p ro
v oke r of such vibration The inter ru pted mo .

“ ”
tion friction or wave does n ot produce th e
, ,

Heat but merely arouses or provokes the in

,

c r eased vibration Of the Particles that really ,

manifest the Heat At the last remembe r the .

, ,

Heat is in the Pa r ticles of the body that

“ ”
feels or ex pe riences it .

The vib r atio n s of Heat se em to have th e p r op

e rtie s of causi n g the Molec ul es to d r aw fu rth e r

apa rt and to manifest less Att r a c ti o n or mo re

, ,

Repul sion whiche v er way one ca r es to e xpres s

,
“ ”
it T hi s movin g awa y of the Molecul es tend
.

12 4
 RAD IA N T ENE RG Y .

to c ause the b ody to incr ease i n v ol um e or siz e ,

“ ”
and occasions what is kn own as E xpa n sion
in Substan c e In thi s wa y H e at transfo rms
.

Solids in to Li qui ds ; Li q uids in to Gases or Va

pors the change being wholl y a matt er of th e

M
,

r elative di stances of the Molec ul es .

ag n e tism i s anothe r form Of E n ergy a nd is ,

generally believed to be a part of the phe n omena

of Elect r icit y if indeed not a fo rm of Ele c
, ,

tricity itself Scie n ce kn ows ve ry littl e abo ut

.

the nature of Magnetism but in a gene r al way

,

holds to the theo ry that it r esults from the

vibration or motion Of the Particles of S ub
stance as do all other forms Of Energy The
,
.

magnetic qualities of a body may be in creased

or decreased b y motio n a ffe c ting the r elatio n of

the Mole cules which fact has bee n r ega r d ed as

,

having some bearing on the theo ry .

El e ctricity i s a form of Energy that S ci e nce ,

regards as also a rising f r om the vib r atio n or

motion of the Pa r ticles of Substa n ce It is .

transmitted like Heat b y Condu ction and B ad

, ,
.

“ ”
iation the waves te n din g to provoke simila r
,

vibrations in the Particles of Substa nc es re ce iv

ing them By many careful investi g ato r s El ec
.
,

tricity is believed to be very c losely r elated to

the phenomenon called light both having much ,

in common Science seems to be disco v e r in g

.

new points of r esemblance betwee n th em, and it

12 5
 M
Y NA I C T H OU G HT
D

is p r ob abl e that in the n ea r futu r e th ey wi ll be

s e en to b e
b u t v a rying fo rms Of the same thin g .

The p urposes of this boo k do n ot c all for an

ex te n ded c o n si d e r atio n of th e prope r ti es of El ec
tricity th e sa m e be in g se rved b y a c o n side r ation
,

of its n at ure b eing aki n to that of the othe r

“
fo rms of E n ergy n am el y vib r atio n or motio n, ,

i n or amo n g the P a rti cl es of M atte r ’

.

Light is a form of E n ergy the study of whi ch ,

is of the greatest interest to Science for the ,

r easo n that the fi eld s e ems to be widening out

c o n tinu o u sly a nd r eachin g out i n to the territo ry

,

fo rme rl y th ought to b e the sp e cia l r egio n of

Ele c t ricity An d i n a n othe r dire c tio n it seems
.
, ,

to be r eachin g out into th e te r rito ry of H e at ,

the l atte r being c o n side r ed by ma ny to be but

a fo rm Of Light i n its l ow er v i b r atio n s In, .

fa c t th e wri te r of this b oo k so c o n siders the

,

sub je c t a n d for th e p urposes of this book i n

, ,

l ate r chapters he will c omb ine Ele c t ric ity H eat

, , ,

and Light in cludi n g also the phen omen a

, , ,

kn own as th e X Ray s B e cqu e r el Rays R adi um

-
, ,

wav e s etc as fo rms of Light — th e c ombined

, .
,
“
f orm s of E n e rgy to be called R adian t En
’
e rgy . In thi s comb in ati on he b el ieves that he ,

is in line with the l at e st a n d best tho ught of

M o dern S cienc e H owev e r he do e s n ot in sist
.
,

up on his re ad er s fo ll owin g thi s idea a nd so if , ,

they p re fer th ey m a y think of e a ch of th e se

,

12 6
 RA D I A N T E N E R GY .

fo rms as separate a n d dist inc t , and ye t not run

c o n t ra ry to th e l in e of tho ught of th e b ook .

Light is not th e simple thin g that it is con

side r e d to be by th e ge n e r a l p ub l i c It is com .

posed of man y pa r ts qu a l ities a nd m anifesta

,

tio n s Its ray s wh e n s e parate d by the Spe c

.
,
“ ”
t rum , a r e see n to c onsist Of wav es or v ibra
tions of di ffering degrees of r ate a n d in ten sity .

The l owe r r ange contain s the heat r a y s a n d it ,

is in te r esti n g to kn ow that there a re r a y s of

h e at too fa r down in the s c ale to be evide n ced
b y h uma n senses that ma y be distinguished b y
del icate instrume n ts But the r e are r a y s still
.

furthe r down i n the s c ale tha t are known to e x

ist theo r eti c all y that ca nn ot b e r egiste re d e ven
, ,

by the fine st in st ruments T o gai n a n id e a of .

the d e li c a cy of these i n st ruments l et us remem ,

b er that Pr of La n gl e y has an in st r ume n t c all e d

.

“
the B olomete r that is so delicat e that it r eg
,
” i -

iste r s a c hange of temperature of on e millio n th

of a deg re e and wi ll registe r the heat of a ca n
,

dl e one and on e half mi le s distant f r om it

-
.

Light v ib r ations aris e from c omb u stio n f ric ,

tion e l e c t ricit y et c c a u sing the Pa r ti cle s to as

.
,

s um e in c r eased Motio n .

L e t us c o n side r the r epo r t of th e Sp ec t rum .

B eginni n g with waves or vib r atio n s fa r b el ow

the sen sibilit y of M a n the s c ale shows a n ad,
“ ”
va nce un ti l th e fir st warm v ib r a ti o n of ir on
12 7
 DYN A MI C TH O UGHT
was reached This first indication of wa rmth
.

comes when the vibrations reach the rate of

p e r s e c on d Then gradually
.

they increase until a dul l red glow is noticed

the lowest v isibl e light ray when the vibra
—

tions are per second Then .

come the orange rays then the gol de n y ellow

, ,

then the pure yellow then the greenish y ellow

, ,

then the pure gr een then the greenish blue then

, ,

the ocean blue then the cyanic blue then the

, ,

indi g o then the violet the latter evidencing

,
—

when the vibrations reach the rate of 7

per second Then come the Ultra
.

violet rays invisible to human si ght but evi

— —

de nce d by chemical media In thi s Ultra violet

.
-

r egion lies the X Rays etc and also the

-

,
.
,
“
Actinic Rays that produce photographs
, ,
’
sunburn one s face and blister the nose that —

cause violent explosions in chemicals — that

transform forms of Substance that a r e em
—

ployed to cure skin diseases etc These Ao ,

.

tin ic or Chemical Rays have an important role

to play m plant life fo r they act upon the green
-

leaves of the plant causing a chemical change

,

by which carbonic acid and wate r are tran s

formed into sugar and starches .

Some of the r ay s of the Ul t r a violet r egio n -

of Light pe n etrate s ubstanc es fo rmerl y c on sid

e r ed solid a n d impenetrabl e An d som e of the m

.

12 8
 RA D IA N T E N E RG Y .

emitted f r om R adium etc wo uld d e st r oy or ,

.
,

g a n ic l ife if applied i n su flicie n t qu antiti e s .

Some of them are p r acti c ally waves of Elec

tricity so that Light a n d Electri c ity a re see n to
be closely r elated .

To give on e an idea of the di ffe r en ce s p ro

duce d b y di fferent r ates Of vib r ation let us ,

imagine a Mas s of Iron shaped like a g r ea t ,

“ ” “ ”
Top capable of being impelled to spin at
,

a constantly increasing rate Of speed b y sOm e ,

Mighty Will At first it is see n as a slowly

.

spinning T op manifesting nothi ng but slow mo

,

tion to our senses

, .

N ow imagi n e our Top spinning at a r ate

,

doubling each secon d The first second the Top

spins at the rate of ! evolutions per second .

We notice n o cha n ge except that we c a n see the,

movement The next second the revol uti ons

.

a r e do ubled to fou r pe r se c o n d Then do ubling .

,

each se c ond we have respectivel y r evol u tio n s

, , ,

of eight per second the n six teen a n d the n i n , ,

the fifth second thi rty two pe r se c o n d The n w e -

.

begin to n otice a chang e .

When the r evo lu tions r ea c h t hi rty two p e r -

s ec on d the frictio n of the mo v in g T op on the

ai r c a u ses it to give fo r th a v e ry l ow deep bass , ,

note of so un d T hi s n ote is like a l ow, d e e p

.

“
hum ,and is the lowest poss ible of pe rce p
tion b y the h uma n hearing altho ugh it is p os ,

12 9
 DYNAMI C THOUGHT
sible that some of the lower forms of life may
be conscious of still lowe r vib ratio n s .

The sixth second the revolutions reach si x ty

fo ur a n d the l ow n ote has grown m uc h highe r
,

in the scal e The seventh second records a rate

.

of 12 8 and the n ote has correspondingly in

,

cr eased Then as the seconds pass we have

.
, , ,

successively 2 56 512 , , ,

the latter in the fifteenth seco n d ,

and rep r e senting the hi ghest note recognizable

by the human ear although it is believed that ,

some of the lower animals may re c ognize sounds

too ac u te for our sense Of hearing D uring this .

inc r ease i n revolutions from the fifth second to

the fifteenth the sound note has rise n rapidly
,
-

“ ”
in the s c ale from the low sullen hum on ,

thro ugh the notes of the musical scale a n d be ,

y ond the r ange of instruments until the shrill ,

n ess becomes so intense as to be almost unbea r

able and fin al ly terminating in a sh rill pie rc ing
, ,
“
shriek like the squeak of t h e bat o nly l ong
”
,

drawn out .

The n f r om th e te rmin ation of th e so und ( b y

r easo n of the r ate of vibratio n having become
too high ) si len ce r eigns for thirty seco n ds ab —

solute sil enc e in spit e of the rap i dly in cr e asin g

,

r ate of vibr atio n s in fa c t b e c a u s e of i t

, , .

Wh en th e fo r ty fifth s ec ond is re a c h ed a nd
-
,

th e rev o lutio n s hav e re a ch ed the r ate of

13 0
 RA D IA N T E N ERG Y .

pe r seco n d o u r T op begin s to emit ,

heat r a y s in creasing each seco n d Then a l it

-
,
.

tle l ater a d ull dim gl ow may be n oti ced Then

,
.
,

a s the s ec onds fly th e d ul l glow ma nifests a

,

deep dark red c olor such as one n oti c es in the

,
’
iro n of the blacksmith s shop soo n afte r it ,
“ ”
begins to glow The n on and on as the
.
, ,

seconds fly the deep r ed grows l ighter and

,

bri ghter gradu ally changing into o range then

, ,

into yellow then into green then in to blue then

, , ,

into in di go then into violet an d then into the

, ,
“ ” “
colo r of whi te heat The n thi s
-
white .

”
heat changes into a still mo r e dazzling white ,

and the n a white impossible to desc r ibe ap

pears so bright clear and brilliant that the e y e
, ,

cannot bear the sight Then suddenly the in .

, ,
~

tense brightness i s s u cceeded b y absolute dark

ness and the moving Top ca nn ot b e see n b y the
,

eye and y et i t mov es on The hi ghest rec

— .

or de d chemi c a l rays of light are estimated to

e qua l a r ate of vibration of

pe r seco n d The vibration of the lowest shade
.

of red light is e stim ated at

and the highest Of v iolet at

per se c ond so w e ma y imagi n e what th e hi gh e st
,

line on the spe c t r um is lik e .

Still vib r ating our Top which has b e c ome

, ,

now a Mass Of V aporized Iron rapidly ten ding ,

towa r d still mo re ethe r eal forms It has pass ed .

13 1
 DYN AMIC TH O UGHT
out from the re gion of li ght waves into another -

,
“ ”
Unknown Region of Vibrations i n whi ch ,

region however exist the vibrations kn own to

, ,
“ ”
us as the X Rays etc It is throwing off
-

,
.

g reat quantities of Electrons If we were to .

use a fluo r escent screen we would be able to Oh

serve the phenomena O f the Roent g en Rays and ,

similar manifestations of Radiant Ene r gy .

O n and on vibrates the Top of what we on c e

called Iron cold iron warm iron hot iron
—
, , ,

melted iron gaseous iron etherealized iron if

, , ,

y o u like . What it is like now the imaginatio n ,

of Man cannot conceive Still the revolutions .

continue doubling each second W hat is be ing

,
.

p r od u c e d?
!
The ima gination cannot conceive
Of what this state of Substance n ow being ,

reached is like By a scientific form O f poet ry

,
.

we mi ght think of it as melting into Energy

pure Ener gy if there were such a thing Long
,
.

since it has been resolved into i ts original Par

fi oles its Corpuscles and perhaps into the
—
,
“ ”
stu ff from which particles are made But .

we must let the curtain drop the wildest fancy

—

cann ot follow the D ance of Substance any f ur

the r
.

The theo ry of the t r ans mi ssion of vib r ations

“ ”
of Radiant Energy by means of waves i n
“
the Ether or something that takes the place
,

of the Ether
”
has been men tio n ed in othe r
,

132
 RA D IA NT E N ERG Y .

pa r ts of the book Referring aga in to it the

.
,

write r would say that he thinks it probable that

“
the waves coming i n c o n ta c t with the co un t
’
less Corpuscles in the Earth s atmosphere com ,

m un icate a high r ate of motio n to them the ,

r esul t being that the y take on the v ib r ations 1m

“ ”
mediately and pas s alon g with the wave
,

current the result being that much that we

—

consider as waves of Light Heat and Elec ,

tricity are but streams of these Corpuscles in

whi ch vibrations have been awakened b y the
“ ”
waves . T hi s idea will help to explai n some
of the phenomena of Li ght whi ch seemed more
,

understandable unde r the Ol d Light Corpuscle -

“ ”
theo ry of N ewton than unde r the wav e the
ory of recent y ears The idea is adva n ced
.

merel y fo r the purpose of setting down the

thought for it plays no important part i n the
,

theory of the book .

Another matte r that sho ul d n ot be overlooked

in connection with Light and Heat and Elec
“ ”
tricity is that Parti c les abso rb or catch the
vib r ations in difi e re n t deg r ees their re c eptivity
,

depending upon thei r partic ula r vibratory

”
mode or custom of thei r kind
, If un able to
.

“ ” ”
absorb the vib r atio n s the y r efle c t them
,
.

Substance of any particular ki nd absorb Heat

, ,

in the degree Of its atomic weight .

In the nex t chapter we shall l ea rn som e thing

13 3
 DYN AMIC TH O UG HT
of The Law of Attracti on that wonde rful Law
,

that makes possible any Motio n o r R adia n t Eu

e rgy.

134
 C HA P TER X

T H E LAW OF ATT RACTI O N

N th e p r evi o u s c hapte r s w e hav e s een that
I all forms of
Radiant Ene rgy, v ia Light

M
, ,

H eat Ele c t r i c ity and Magnetism a r ose fr om

, ,

the otio n of the Pa r ticles of S ubstan c e It .

n ow becom e s impo r tan t to l ea rn j u st what c a u se

“ ”
thi s Motio n s of th e P a rticles Scienc e is
.

somewhat haz y a n d foggy on this s ubject but ,

i n a ge n era l wa y decides that it is c a u sed b y

“
th e mu t ual re latio n s and positio n s of the par
ticl e s a risin g from thei r respective attractive
,
”
qualities as a r ece n t writer has exp r esse d it
, .

Well thi s is b ette r tha n the Old wa y of seeki n g

,

r efuge and r etreat in a mere vol um e of den se

wo r ds It is i n deed the only l ogic a l c o n cl usio n
.
,

thi s one that the ope r atio n s of the Law of At

t r a c tio n a r e ma nife sted in the M ot i o n of the
P arti cl es .

This g r eat Law of Att r a c tio n is the gr eatest

Law i n N at ur e It operates on all planes of
.

l ife It is alway s i n ev iden c e L e t u s c on

. .

si d e r it .

Let u s b e gin b y c onsiderin g the most mag

135 ,
 DYN A MIC THOUGHT
n ifice n t and constant exhibition of that Law
Gravitation Gravitation is the Riddle Of the
.

Universe and the one form of Energy that

,

balks Science so much a mystery that Science

—
“ ”
does not even hazard a guess at its nature
no theory of the origin and nature Of Gravita
“ ”
tion is to be found in the books Let us see .

what Gravitation is .

“
It is more than the power that pulls things
”
to the earth as the avera ge man woul d defin e
,

it It does more than cause water to run down

.

hill and turn mill wheels to drive machine ry

,
-
.

Wate r power r esults from Gravitation but

-

even the Energy of N ia gara Falls is in sig

n ifican t when compared to the other manifesta

tions of the Mother of Energy— Gravitation .

“
Webster defines Gravitation as That at
traction or force by which all bodies or particles
”
in the universe tend toward each other .

Following that definition let us add that ,

Ev e ry p ar ticl e of Su bs tan ce has an attr action

for e v e ry oth e r p ar ticl e .

“
In V iew of our belief that thi s attraction
i s a form of mental e ffort let us re gard the ,
“ ”
term Attraction as being a fo rm of what we
“ ” “ ”
call D esire or even Love in the mental
, ,

world If you will think of it in this way you

.
,

will be better able to fall in with our lines of

thought .

36
 THE LAW OF ATTR A CTI ON
An d in addi tion to every particle O f Sub
,

stance having an attraction ( love or desire ) for

every othe r particl e it has the m e an s an d p owe r
,

to dr aw that othe r p ar ticl e towar d itse lf, an d

to m ov e towar d that othe r p ar ticl e at th e sam e
tim e Webster gives a very clea r idea of thi s
.

“
when he defines Attraction as An inv isibl e
p ow e r in a body by which it dr aws any thing to
its e lf ; the p owe r in n atur e acting m utu al ly be
tw e e n bodie s, or ul tim ate p ar ticl e s, te n ding to
dr aw th e m tog e the r, or to p r oduce th e ir c ohe
sion or c om bin ation , an d c on v e r se ly r e sis ting
”
s e p ar ation .

The maj ority of pe r so n s whe n thinking of

,

Gravitation are satisfied with the idea that

,
“
it is a power that pul ls thin gs down to the
”
g round and do not think of it as a force that
,
” “ ”
pulls thing s other ways besides down ,

and which is possessed and e x er c ised b y the

speck of dust as well as b y the whole ea r th by
—

the molecule as well as by the mass The rea .

son Of thi s is that this power is so slight in

small bodies of Substance that it is unnoticed ;
and that only when the mass is s ufficiently large
“ ”
to make the pull st r ong does one perceive
and app r eciate that the force exists T he lack
’

of information on the part of the average pe r

son r ega r ding this subject is amazing pa r ti e n ,

13 7
 DYN AMIC THO U GHT
l arly when the importance of th e kn owle dg e is
un derstood .

The attraction that holds the mole c ules of

Substance together is Gravitatio n The at .

“ ”
tractio n that pulls a piece Of Substance to
the ea r th is Gravitation The attraction that .

keeps the suns and pla n ets in their orbits is

Gravitation Let us see the ope r ations of the
.

Law .

In Astronomy y ou ma y lea rn that the move

ments of the planets around the s un and the
moons around their planets their regul ar and -

constant relative positions are c aused by the

—

force of G r avitation If it were not for thi s

.

attractio n by the Sun the planets wo uld fly out

,

into space like a stone from a sling The At

,
.

traction O f G r avitation acts on the planets just

as does th e string of the whi rling sling that
k eeps the stone from flying away during the
whirling until the string i s released Some .

astronomers think that our s un revolves around

some greate r sun and this again aro un d a
,

g reate r a n d so on to infi nity If thi s be so

,
.
,

then the Att r a ctio n of Gravitation is that which

holds them all i n their orbits and places i n spit e
of their motio n .

And in Physi c s you may lea rn that thi s same

,

Attractio n Of Gravitation prevents the people

a n d Obje c ts on the surface of the earth f r om
1 38
 T HE LAW OF ATTRACT I O N
flyin g Off in to spa c e An d that it ho ld s the
.

po r tio n s Of th e e arth togethe r preventing them ,

f r om flyin g apa r t .

And re membe r this , for it is impo r ta n t the

,
—

Att r a c ti o n of the Ea r th g r eat a n d powe rf ul as

,

i t is is n othin g mo r e tha n th e com bin e d at

,

t r a c tiv e p owe r Of its c on stit uen t mole c ules or ,

atoms or pa r ts The cen t re of th e E arth is

, .

the Cent r e of the Att r a c tio n b ec a u se it is th e

,

c ent re of the aggr egatio n of its P a rti cles .

It mu st n ot be suppos e d that the E arth sim

“ ”
ply att r a c ts down wa r d that is towa r d its
, ,

c e n tre O n the c ont r a ry l arge mass e s of ea rth

.
,

— larg e mo un tains for i n stanc e— exer t a c e r

,

tain d e gr e e of Att r a c tio n of G r av i tatio n an d ,

“ ”
ex periments have shown that a pl umb i s
slightl y defle c t e d b y r easo n of th e p r oximi ty of
a la rg e mo un tai n An d the r easo n that bodies
.

“ ”
l ose weight as the y des c end f r om the su r
“ ”
fa c e Of the earth is b e c a u se the y l eav e ab ove
them a ce r tai n l arge po r tio n of the molecul es
composin g the ea r th which mas s of mole cules
,

ex e r t a n attractio n proportio n ate to their mass ,

whi ch att r a c tio n bala nc es th e att r a c tio n of the

“ ”
mass of e arth b e n eath the m
’
.

S cience t e a ches that if the e a r th w ere h o ll ow

in the cen t r e the weight the r e woul d be ! ero
, ,

or n othing at a ll and that a body wo uld float i n

,

th e spa ce at th e c entre of th e earth just as does

139
 DYN AMIC THO U GHT
a b al loo n in th e ai r the reaso n the r eof be in g
,

that the attraction would be equalized— equal

attra c tio n from every di rection counte rbal ,
’
an cin g each other .Considering the earth s
r adius to be 4000 miles a body that weighed
,

100 pounds on the su rfa c e woul d weigh but 7 5

po unds at the depth of 1000 miles ; but 50
po un ds at a depth of 2 000 miles ; but 2 5 pounds
at a depth of 3000 miles ; and Nothing or ! ero , ,

at a depth of 4000 miles which would be the ,

Centre of the Earth T his of course supposes

.
, ,

that the Sub sta n ce of which the earth is com

posed is Of unifo rm d en sity f rom s urface to
cent r e .

From a n e qual di stance above the surface of

the earth bodies released or dropp e d will
, , ,

reach the s u rface at exactly the same de g ree of

speed and i n exa c tly the same time— thi s irre
,

sp e ctiv e of weight or size In other words a

.
,

cork or piece of lead n o matter what their sizes

,

may be wi ll t r avel with equa l r apidity In

, .

“
case whe re the li ghter substance t r avels
mo r e slowly ( compare a feather and bullet for ,

i n stance ) the di ffe r ence is c aused by the l ight

Obje c t meetin g with mo r e resistance from the
ai r This appa r ent exc eptio n h as b een e x
.

pla in e d awa y b y the exp e rime n t of d ropping

the b ul l et and the feathe r in a va cuum t ub e in ,

whi ch th er e was n o r esistance f r om a ir th e con ,

14 0
 TH E LAW OF ATTRA CTIO N
sequen c e being that both des c en ded p r e c isely
at the same in sta n t An othe r similar e x p e ri
.

ment is to pla c e the feathe r upon a piece of

iron whereb y the r esistan c e of the ai r i s pre
vented and the feather will maintai n its posi
,

tion during the drop and will reach the gro un d

,

r esting on top Of the iron just as it started

,
.

An d remember this please that the small Ob

, ,

j ce t attracted b y the earth exerts an attraction

on its own ac c o un t If the two we r e of the
.

same size they wo uld exert an equal attracting

power but as on e is smaller its attracting power
,

is very slight compared with that of the large

mass B u t it is true that the particle of dust
.

attra c ts the ea r th precisely as the earth attracts

the particle of d u st the difi e r e n ce being solel y
—
“ ”
a matter Of degree depending upon the mass
of the body The amo un t or degree of the com
.

bin e d attra c ting powe r i s determi ned b y the

combined total of the two masses D ista n ce .

lessens the degree of attr actio n thus as bodies

—

are lifted abov e the ea r th the weight dec r eases

very grad u all y a n d by v e ry slight degrees b ut
, ,

c onstantl y a n d inv a riably The poles of the

.

earth ar e flatten e d a n d consequentl y th e

, , ,

weight of a n Obj e c t s l ightly increases as it is

carried from e quato r to pole .

Concluding our c o n sideration of Gravitation ,

it will be well to c all y our attentio n to the fact

14 1
 DYN AM I C T H O UGHT
that G r avitatio n di ffers from the fo rms of R a
di ant Energy kn own as Heat Light Electricity , ,

a n d Magn etism in seve r al ve ry important par

ticul ar s whi c h seems to go fa r i n the direction
,

of proof that the l atte r a r e by inc i den ts o r c o n

sequences of the fo rmer .

In the first place G r avitatio n so fa r as is

, ,

kn own is not dependent upon c aused by or

, , ,

maintain ed by any othe r Forc e or fo rm of Eu

,

e rgy . N o r does it seem to be derived from

some gr eat r ese rv oi r from which it obtains its
,

supply Of E n ergy O n the c ontra ry it seems to

.
,
“
be a thin g in -
self supportin g self -

e xisting an in trinsic thin g i n fact It does

—
, .

n ot seem to be lost to bodies b y r adiation An d .

consequently there seems to be no need of a

body reple nishing its supply as there is no loss , .

Gravitation seems to be a constant s om e thing ,

remaining always with bodies and neither being

l ost or a c quired It exists between the Atoms
.
,

Molecul es Masses all in the same way In

,
— .

fact one is tempted to think of the planets an d

,

worlds i n space as Molecules of some greater

,

M ass hel d together by G ravitation just as are

the M olecul es held togethe r Remember that .
,

th e M o l e cul es an d Atoms are n ot in absol ute

“ ”
c o n ta c t but the r e is always a sp ace be tw e e n
,

them a l though th e spa ce or dista nce may be

,
“ ” “ ”
in s en sib l e to u s As ab ov e so below
.
, ,

142
 TH E LAW OF ATTRA CTIO N
says the Old o ccult apho rism and it seems to ,

be so.

The n again G r avitation is believed to act

,

instan tan e ously and does n ot re qui r e Time to

,

pas s between bodies as does Light Heat Elec

, , ,

tricity ,
Magnetism Radiant Energy Light
— .

travels through the Ethe r ( as l ight waves ) at -

the rate of miles a second The same .

is true Of Heat and Of Electricity B ut Gravi .

tation travels instantaneously For in stance .

,

if a new star were to spring i nto existence at

s ome inconceivable distance from the earth it
would require thousands of years for its l ight
to reach us But its Attraction of Gravitation
.

would be felt instan tly D O you r ealize what

.

thi s means ? It means that Gravitatio n is i n

“
some way connected with the Ethe r or con ,
”
v e yin g medium that an impulse c ommuni
,

c ate d at some point of space trillions of miles

away is felt at on ce at ou r poi n t i n space a n d ,

vice versa T here is some awful myste ry here

.
,

and the laws of Substan c e and Fo rce as gen , ,

orally un derstood do not acco un t for it

, An d .

the theories regarding the Ethe r d o n ot th r ow

l ight upon it B u t wait a bit!
.

But mo r e than this Scie nc e holds that.

Gravitation does n ot r e q uir e a m e dium that it

—

seems to be its own medium n eedin g n o

—
“ ”
Ether or other medium to t r a n smit its ln
14 3
 DYN A MIC THO U GHT
flue n ce In this respect also Gravitation dif
.
,

fers from the form Of Radiant Energy An d .

“ ”
more it is not cut O ff or interfered with by
,
-

any intervening body for its force Operates ,

through such intervening bodies For instance .

,

in an eclipse of the Sun the Moo n passes be ,

tween the Earth and the Sun but the Gravita ,

tion is not afi e cte d in the sli ghtest for the ,

bodies would evidence such change immediately

were it to occur .

SO Gravitation acts instantaneously ; is its

own medium and may not be interfered with by
,

an intervening body It indeed is in a difi e r

‘
,
.
,

ent class from Li ght Heat and Electricity , .

And now let us conside r the other forms of

Attraction .

In the previous chapters we saw that the

“
form of Attraction called Cohesion caused
the molecules to tend to each other and to re ,

main in more or less close contact the di fferin g ,

degrees of Cohesion determinin g the D ensity ,

etc of the body Were the Attractive force of

.
, .

Cohesion suddenl y removed the most solid ,

bodies as well as the lightest ones wo uld in

, ,

stan tl y fly into very fine powder thus being ,

resolved into their constituent molec ul es The .

“
separation of the Molecules that is the set , ,
”
ting further apart occasioned by Heat is
, ,
“ ”
spo ken of b y Physi c ists as Rep ul sion But .

144
 THE LA W OF ATT R A CTI O N
the writer holds that repulsion is an entirely
di fferent thing and that the heat merel y causes
,

the Molec ul es to lose a portio n Of their Attrae

tive power for each other Until the heat being .

withdrawn the Molecules r espond to the unin

,

te r rup te d Attraction The Molecules are like

.

lovers who are attracted toward each other ,

and remain attached unless separated v1 olently ,

or b y some fading Of Attraction Consider .

Heat as a disturbing element a m isun de r

—

”
standing between the molecula r lovers who ,

under its influence draw somewhat apart and ,

are only re united whe n the Obstacle is r emoved ,

and harmon y again manifested .

As we have shown you in a previous chapter ,

“ ”
the so called properties
-
Of Matter i e ,
. .
,

Hardn ess Tenacity Malleabilit y D uctility

, , , ,

etc are simpl y evidence of a persistent Cohe

.
,
“ ”
siv e n e ss Of the Molecules — a strong love or
“ ”
desire for each other that caused them to
adopt eve ry possible means in their power to
resist and prevent the separation of the Mole
, ,

cules forming the mass It was like a des .

“
perate attempt to prevent the breaking up of
”
the family .

Each so called Special Physical Property of

-

Matter is see n to be but the action of the Mole

cule resisting separation in Obedience to that
‘
,
” “
law of its b eing called Attractio n or G ra v i ,

14 5
 DYN A M
IC T H UGH O T

“ ”—
tation , or Cohesion or A dhesion but
,

which might as fitly be called D esire “ or ,

“ ”
Love . An d remember that thi s l aw does
, ,

n ot seem to be merely one of self prese rv atio n -

of the Molecule— for it r emains intact eve n

after the separation from its companions or

family It is more for it is a law that ca u ses
.
,

it to be n d all its energies in r emaining within

“ ”
molec ul ar di stance or close companionship
with its family and resisting disinte g ration It
, .

“ ”
i s l ike the social instinct i n Man if on e may ,

be pardo n ed from usin g the figur e .

N ow fo r the Attraction Of the Atoms

“
Chemi c al Affi nity or Chemism ,as it is ,

called An Atom you know i s the chemical

.
, ,

unit of Matter and the smallest pa rticle of

,

Matter that ca n enter into combinatio n ( leav

ing the Corpuscle out of the consideration fo r ,

the moment ) These Atoms exhibit and mani

.

fest an Att r action for each other that causes

“ ”
them to form combinations or marriages ,

and thus to combine forming a molecule B ut ,

.

“ ”
remembe r always that when Atoms combine
, ,

they do not merge their identities they simply

—
“ ”
marry , an d nothing mo r e E ach ato m .

maintains its own iden tity and is fo un d inta c t ,

“ ”
if the ma r riage i s destroyed b y chemic a l
pro c ess which might be called the te rmin atio n
,
“ ”
of th e mo lecul a r ma r riage by di v o rce , ,

14 6
 T HE LAW OF ATTRACTIO N
that is b y one Atom fo r saking its mat e and
,
“ ”
se e kin g a new a ffin ity in the shape of som e
mo r e attractive ( or att r a c tin g ) Atom For .
,

alas the Atoms a r e more or less fickle a n d

, ,

Often leave their l ife partn e r s for some oth er

-

fascinating Partic le At times there i s ma ni

.

“
fe ste d a co n dition of how happ y c o uld I b e
’ ”
with either were t other fai r charme r awa y
,

the r e is a conflict of attractions .

“ ” “
There is more flirting and a ffairs of th e
”
heart in the world Of Atoms than in the region
Of the Mole c ule s for while the latter are apt to
,

seek only the companio n ship of their own

“
fa mily or some n earl y related family th e
, ,
“
Atoms have quite a number Of possible affin i
”
ties a n d will in variabl y desert a lesser att r a e
,

tion for a greater on e ( thus forming a n ew

molec ul e ) and l eave the dese r ted one to get
along alone as best it may or else form a new ,

alliance with some other a ffin ity who is eithe r

impe rvious to the attraction Of the more bril
l ian t cha rme r or els e is out of the dang er of
,

temptatio n .

B ut if we ana lyze and c a r efully co n side r thi s

,
” “ ”
Chemi c al Affinity Ch e mism we will se e
, ,
“
that it com e s well un de r the definition of At
”
tractio n as given by Webste r an d qu ote d i n ,

the fi r st part of this chapte r It c ertainly c omes .

“
un der the rul e of the p owe r in nature acting
14 7
 DYN AMIC THOUGHT
m u tually be tw e e n bodie s, or u l tim ate p ar ticl e s,
”
te n ding to dr aw the m tog e th e r ,etc .

The writer thinks that he is justified in ask

ing y ou to consider Gravitation Cohesion Ad , ,

h e sion and Chemical Affin ity as related forms

of the same thin g If you do not like to call
.

“ ” “
this same thin g by the name of Gravita
“
tion suppose we call it The Law of Attrae
,

tion,
of w hi ch Gravitation Cohesion Adhe , ,

sion Chemi cal Affinity or Chem i sm are but

,
“ ”
di fferent aspects ( This . relation is de
scribed in Chapter X III ) .

“
And the writer believes that this Law of
”
Attraction is the underlyin g cause of all that
we call Energy Force Power Motion e tc in
, , , ,
.
,
“ ”
the Physical world For if Gravitation ac
.

“ ” “
co un ts for all Mass Motion or Mechani c al ,
” —
Motion if Molecular Cohesion and the vi ,

br ation s accompanying it manifest in forms of

,
“ ”— “
Molecular Motion and if Atomic Chem
” “
ical Affinity or Chemism manifest in ,
“ ”—
Atomic Motion and if even the Corpuscles
“
in their movements obey this same Law of At
”
traction in some form and if all Force and
—

“ ”—
Energy is but a Mode of Motion then if ,

all this be true a r e we not justified in claiming

,
“ ”
that thi s Law of Attr action is the Basis of
All Energy Force and Motion ? And are we
,

n ot j u stified in thinking of this

“
Law of At
14 8
 TH E LAW OF ATTRA CTIO N
t r a c tio n as alwa y s man ifesting in the dire c
tion of drawing together particles of Substance
-
be those particles suns planets masses mole , , ,

cules atoms or corpuscles in pursuance of

,
—

some basic law impo sed upon All things by -

,
‘
That which is above Things l
- - - -

The following quotation is interesting i n our ,

consideration of this subject

“
There are other forces besides gravity a n d ,

on e of the most active of these i s chemical af

fin ity . Thus for instance an atom of oxygen

, ,

has a very strong attraction for one of carbon ,

and we may compare these two atoms to the

earth and a stone lodged upon the top of a
house Within certain limits this attraction is
.
,

intensely powerful so that when an atom of

,

carbon and one of oxygen have been separated

from each other we have a species of energy of
,

position just as truly as when a stone has been

separated from the earth Thus by having a .

large quantit y of oxygen and a large quantity

of carbon in separate states we are in posses ,

sion of a large store of e n e rgy of position

‘
.

When we allowed the stone and the earth to

rush together the e n e rgy of position was trans
,

formed into that of actual motion and we should ,

therefo r e expect something similar to happen

when the separated ca rbon and oxygen are al
lowed to ru sh together T hi s takes place when
.

14 9
 DYN AMIC THOUG HT
w e burn c oal in our fires and the p r imary r e ,

sult as far as en e rgy is concerned is the p ro

, ,

duction of a la rge amoun t of heat We a r e .

,

the r efore l ed to c onj ecture that heat may de

,

n ote a motio n of particles on the s mall s c ale

j u st as the ru shing togethe r of the stone and
the ea r th denotes a motion on the large It .

thus appea r s that we may have invisible m ol e c

ul ar energy as well as v isible mechanical e u
”
e rgy .
- B alf our Ste war t .

A To the w rite r it seems that the Particle of

Substance fin ds within its Mind prin ciple ( for -

y ou kn ow w e have seen that all Substance had

somethin g akin to Life an d M ind ) a constant
cravin g imbedded in its ve ry nature which
, ,

ca u ses it to seek Satisfa c tio n This craving for .

Satisfaction r es ults in Un rest and seeks a solu ,

tion alo n g two lines These two lines are indi

.

c ate d by two entirely di ffe r ent D esires that it

finds within itself the fi r st being a D esi r e or

—

Inclination to seek the companionship of some

othe r Particle the seco n d being a D esire or
—

Inclinatio n to be F r ee of Attachment or Entan

gl e m e n t .

The D esi r e for Attachmen t arises from the

forc e of the Law of Attraction that exists be
tween each Particle of Substan c e The D esire .

for N on attachment arises f r om so me inward

-

i nclin atio n fo r F r eedom These two D esires o r

.

150
 T HE LAW OF ATTRA CTI O N
Inclin at i o n s may b e c al l ed th e De si re for Im
p re ssio n a n d the De si re f or E x p re ssio n .

Th e De si re for Imp r essio n ( or p re ssin g in )

m a nifests a l on g li n es of a c tio n ten din g towa rd
Atta c hm en t Mo r en e ss Companionship Com
, , ,

b in atio n The D esi r e for E xp re ssio n ( or

.

p r essin g out) manifests along the lin es of a c tion

ten ding towa r d Individu alit y F r eedo m In de , ,

p e n de n ce U n
, att ach m e n t etc , A .n d both are
st r o n g c r a v i ngs — and both tend to p r oduc e Un
“ ”
r est which r esults in Motio n Th e p ull of
, .

the De si r e of Impression exists alwa y s a n d is ,

alwa y s modified and c o un teracted b y the

“ ”
p u sh of the D esi r e for Exp r essio n An d .
,

r es ulti n g from the pla y of these two D esi r es or ,

Fo rc es r esult Activity Motio n a n d Change

, ,
.

L ik e th e two c o nfli c ting a n ge ls i n the Persia n

mythology Ahrima n and O rm uz d these two
— —

D esi re s w r estle with each othe r i n the theat r e

of the Un iverse — c o n stant Motio n a n d Chan g e
b ein g th e resul ts .

An d if the w rit r ma y be pa r do n ed fo r dr op
,

pin g i n to M y sti c ism for the moment ma y it ,

n ot be that these c onflicting D esires for Sepa

r aten es s a n d Un ity r espe c tivel y a r e b u t di ffe r

, ,

en t fo rms of the D esire for Satisfa c tion through

O nene ss Imp r essio n seek s O neness b y com
.

b in ati o n wi th othe r s e pa r ate d Parti c l e s but ,

fin ds it n o t Exp .r essio n s eek s O nene ss by

1 51
 DYN AMIC THOUGHT
d rawin g apart and e n de av orm g to r ealize it in
that way but fin ds it n ot But both a re but
, .

difi e r e n t aspects of the same D esire fo r Satis

faction and onl y when the Mind recogniz e s
,

O nenes s in D iversi ty does Satisfaction come .

And thus the lesson of the P a r ticle becomes the

Lesson of the Ma
These conflicting e sire s of Inclinations of
the Particles the on e ur ging it along the lines
—

of Attraction — the other along the lines of

Separation produce the D ance of the Atoms
—

— the Motion of the Particles .

When the Particle manifests along the lin es

of Expression it pushes itself away from the
other Particle and consequently also pushes
, , ,

the other Particle away When it manifests.

along the lin es of Impression it p ulls i tself ,

toward the othe r Particle and at the same time

,

p ulls the other Particle toward itself In both .

“ ”
cases the medium of the pulling extends over
the space separating them as will be desc ribed ,

in future chapters This pulling and pushing

.

“
is c alled by Chemistry Att r actio n and R e p ul
”
sion of the Particles .

It is perhaps unnecessa ry to state that th e

Forc e of the Attraction of Cohesio n or of Chem
ical Affinity is much stronger than that of Gravi
tation i n the case of th e same Particles O the r
, .

wise if on e picked up a piece of i r o n the At

, ,

152
 TH E LAW OF ATTRA CTI O N
t r a c tio n of G r av itatio n wo ul d ca u s e its partic l e s
to sepa r ate and fall to the g r o un d whereas , ,

the Att r a c tion of Cohesio n and that of Chemi c a l

Affinity enable the Parti c les to counteract th e
p ul l of Gravitation and thus r emain inta c t
, .

Compared with Cohesion or Chemical Affini ty,

the p ull of G r avitation is incomparably weak .

The fo rc e which holds together two atoms of

water r ep r ese n ts a high degre e of dynami c
powe r a n d the shock of fo r cible sepa r atio n of
,

chemical atoms produc es somethi ng akin to a n

ex plosion So we see that the Att r action of th e
.

Pa rticles while of the same nature as G r avita

,

tion i s much higher in intensity

, .

B ut notwithstanding the powe r of the At

t r action it s e ems to be a matter inhe r ent in th e
,

n at u re of the Particle and to represen t a s ome

,

thing lik e Will in response to D esi r e

, .

“ ”
The v aryi n g push and p ull or th e two D e
si r es would nec essa rily c ause a r evol utio n of
,

ea c h P a r ticle on its own a xis and a re volutio n ,

a r o un d each othe r be side s man y in stances of

n

r ushin g togethe r and awa y from e a c h othe r .

In the se forms of Motion is to be fo un d th e

ca u se of the vib r atio n s p r od uci n g Radia n t Eu
e rgy , kn own as Light , H e at Ele c tri c it y a nd ,

Magn etis m .

153
 CHAPTE R XI

TH E M
T H E O RY O F DYN A I C TH O UG H T

RO M the prece din g c hapt er s w e ha v e

F lea rn ed that !
( )
1 The forms o f For c e or R ad i a n t E n e r gy ,

kn own as Light Heat Magneti sm a n d El ec

, ,
“ ”
tricity a re
, Modes of Motion arisin g f r o m ,

th e O rigi n a l M otio n of th e P a rt icle s of Sub

stanc e ( Molecul es Atoms Co rpuscles or Ele c
, ,

t r o n s ) An d that s uch O rigi n al Motio n of th e

.

P a rticl e s arises f r o m th e O pe r atio n of Th e Law

of A tt r a c tio n ;

( )
2 That th e fo r ms o f Att r a c tive Fo r c e or

E n e rgy kn own as Gravitation Cohesio n Adhe

, , ,

sion Atomic Attractio n Chemical Affin ity or

, ,

Chemism a n d Corpuscul a r Att r a c tion a l so

, ,

aris e f r om th e ope r atio n of the Law of Att ra e

tio n ;
( 3 ) That f r om the above it foll ows that
, ,

All M anifestatio n s of Forc e a n d Energy i n In

o rgani c S ubstance ( uiz both R adiant E n e rgy
.
,

i n its fo rm s of L ight Heat Magn etism El ec

, , ,

tricity e t c ; a nd also Attra c tiv e E nergy in its

, .

fo rm s of G r av i tatio n Cohesio n Adhesion ,

, ,

154
 TH E TH E OR Y OF DYN AM I C T H O UG HT
Chemic a l Afiinity or Atomi c Att r actio n a nd
Corp u s cula r Att r actio n ) arise f r om th e ope r a
tio n of th e Law of Att r a c tio n .

It will be wel l to r emembe r that the fa c t that

some of th e a b o v e fo rms of Radia n t Fo rc e or
E n ergy s uch as H eat Light Magnetism and
, ,

Electricity ma y arise f r om otio n t r a n smi tted

,

from othe r S ubsta n ce d o e s n ot alte r the m at

,
M ,

“ ”
ter For if the y a ris e from wav e s f r om
.

some othe r Substance it me r ely follows that

,

the O riginal Motion that gave r ise to the

“ ”
waves aro s e from the operation of the Law
O r if they arise from i n te r
M
“
of Attractio n .
,
”
r up te d Motio n it merely follows that the o
,

tio n that is in terrupted ma y be t r a c ed ba c k to

O riginal Motio n that arose f r om the ope ratio n
of the Law of Att r a c tion So that all Me c ha n
.

ic al Powe r an d a ll the fo rms of E n e r gy or

,

Fo rce p r oducing the same ( omitti n g for th e

“
mome n t the forms of E n ergy or Fo rc e of Liv
ing O rganisms ”
which will b e des cribed l at er
,

on ) arise from the operatio n of the Law of At

tractio n .

N ow for the n ext step We have see n that

, .

the ope r atio n of th e Law of Att r a c tio n re s ul ts

f r om Vita l Mental Ac tio n on th e pa rt of th e
-

Life a n d M ind Princ iple inhe r e n t i n the n at ure

of the P a r ti c l e s of S ubstan c e Conse qu en tl y .
,

all fo rms of E n e r gy and Forc e a r ising f r om th e

155
 DYN AMIC THOU G HT
operatio n of The Law of Attraction the latte r —

bein g the r esult of Vital Mental Action— then

-

it follows that
All f orm s of En e rgy an d For ce hav ing its

tion s of Vital -
M
origin in the Law of Attraction ar e m anife sta
e n tal Ac tion

But this is not all for we have not c on sid

—
.

ered the Energy and Force abiding in and mani ,

”
fe ste d by what are called Livin g O rganisms
,
“
,

such as human animal and plant life which a r e

, ,

manifested by the physical organisms or

“ ”
bodies of man animal and plant In order
, .

‘
to avoid a long digression into the realms of
biology we will omit all but a passing reference
,

to the theories that seek to identify the action

of the cells of or g anic life with those of the

particles of inorg anic life for remember that

—
,

O rganic Substance has its Molecules Atoms ,

and Corpuscles as well as its higher combina

,
“ ”—
tions known as Cells and we will seek the
ultimate source of all fo rms of Force a n d En
e rgy, exhibited b y O rganic Life
“ ”
in that,
“ ”
which l ies back of Physical Action We .

need o a rgumen t her e for all will r ea dily

n —

recognize that behind the physical action of

man animal and plant lies Life and Mind and
, , ,

that therefore all Force and Energy a risin g

from such action must be manifestations of
V ital Mental Action
-
.

156
 THE TH E O R Y OF DYN AMIC THOUGHT

An d so s ummi ng up our concl u sio n s r egard

,

i n g Fo rc e a n d Ene r gy a n d M otion i n Inor

g a nic S u bsta nce — a n d the n in O rga ni c Sub
stance — we arrive at an understanding of the
B asic Pr oposition of the Theory of Dyn amic
Thought which is as follows !

MM
,

B AS I C P R OP O S ITI ON That All form s an d e at

— .

hibition of For ce En e rgy ,

otion an d P ow e r,

ar e m anif e s tation s of Vital e n tal Action

M
-
.

An d that c on s e q u e n tly, at th e l as t the r e is no

M M
,

Force bu t Vital e n tal Forc e ; n o En e rgy bu t

MM M
-

Vital -
e n tal En e rgy ; no otion bu t Vital

e n tal otion ; no P ow e r but Vital -

e n tal

P ow e r .

It is possible that the average reader will fail

to r e c ognize the tremendous importance of the
a b ove propositio n It is most revolutionary
.
,

and i s not onl y dire c tly opposed to the Mate

rialistic theory which makes Matter the do mi

nant factor the only factor in fact in Life ;

— —
,

but it is also far di fferent from the opinion of

the average person who has been taught to
“ ” “ ” “
think of blind force dead matter me , ,
” “
chan ical energy power of machinery e n
, ,
”
gines , etc And yet y ou are invited to go
.
,

back over the path that leads u p to the theory ,

and test and e x amine every bit of the road for

weak spots insecure bridges etc the write r
—
,
.
-

feels that the wo rk will bear ex amin atio n H e .

1 57
 Y N A M I C THOU G H T
D

think s that he has succeeded not onl y in proving

that ( 1 ) T he Univers e is Al ive a n d Thinking ;
and ( 2 ) That Min d is D omina n t but he be
—

lie v e s a l s o that he has made at least partiall y

, ,

un derstandab l e the ol d oc cul t and metaphysical

aphorism that has been hea r d so much in these
“
later days— the stateme n t that All is Mi n d
’
Mind is All .

The only fact needed now is the p r oof of the

ol d oc c ul t theo ry that Matte r or S ubstan c e
bl en ds g r adually in to Mind a n d that i n the end
,

it is fo un d to have its origi n the r e So far .

,

S c ienc e has not given u s this p r oof but it be ,

gins to look that way although Science does not

,

d r eam of what lies at the end of the road she is

t r avellin g She tells us that she sees Matter
.

m el tin g i n to Force or Energy an d that perhaps ,

th e Univ er se ma y be fo un d to be Energy or
Fo rce at the last But she igno r es the fact
, .

that her investigations have already proven ( to

tho se who know how to combin e them ) that
Mind is back of Forc e— that all Fo rce is Mental
Fo rc e at the last An d so you se e it is not so
, .
, ,

fa r a cry from Matter to Min d in these days of

the Twentieth Centu ry Th e b ri dge is bein g
.

e rec ted b y th e Mat e rialists b ut the Mentalist ,

wi l l b e th e fir st to cr oss ove r it .

B ut there a re many impo r ta nt qu esti o n s

ah e a d of us fo r c o n side r ation in r elatio n to th e
1 58
 THE T HE OR Y OF DYN A M I C THO UGH T

Theory of Dyn amic Tho ught And w e mu st .

haste n on to them .

O ne of th e fir st question s that m u st be con

side r e d is that of the t r a n s mi ssio n of For c e ,

E n e rgy or Motio n Scienc e has told us that

.

“ ”
Light t r avels and is c o n tagio u s that Heat ,
“ ”
travels a n d is co n tagious that Ele c tricity
,
”
t r av e l s and is c o n tagio u s that Magnetism ,
“
travels and is co n tagio u s ”
B ut is has failed
.

to find evidences of Cohesive Force , or Adhe

siv e Fo rc e or the Force of Gravitatio n or the
, ,

Force of Chemical Aflini ty or the Fo rc e of

‘
,
“ ”
Corpuscular Aflinity being co n tagious
,
an d ,
“ ”
although it recognizes that the y must travel
beyo n d the limits of the bodies manifestin g
them y et it has hazarded n o theory or hypo
,

thesis worth y of the n ame to a c co un t fo r the

, ,

phenome n on It info rms us that Light Heat

.
,
‘
,
”
Magnetism and Electri c ity travel ( via waves
of the
‘ ”
Ethe r ) at the rate of miles pe r
—
second a n d that whe n the y r each thei r de s
“ ”
tin ation the Ethe r waves set up simila r
vib r atio n s i n the S ubsta nc e wi th whi c h the y
come i n c onta c t The onl y explanatio n of the
.

“ ” “
method or medi um of t r avel is the A r isto
’ ”
tle s Ethe r Theory whi c h while gene r all y ao
, ,

ce p te d as a working hy pothesis neve r thel e s s , ,

brin gs a b r oad smile to the face of an y tho ught

ful sc i en tist who c onsiders it i n de t ail As for .

159
 DYN AMIC TH OUGHT
the medium of the transmission of Gravitation ,

Cohesion Chemical Affinity and Molecular Af

,

finity Science is mute

,
All that she says is
.

that Gravitation is believed to travel in s tan

tan e ously over distances that it takes Light ,

travelling at the rate of miles per sec

on d ov e r tw o th ous an d y e ar s to travel
,
V erily
.
,

Gravitation defies Scientific theories and esti

“
mates and laughs at the Ether
,
Let us
see if the D ynamic Thought Theory throws any
li ght on the subj ect !
T he first step in the solution of the problem
of the transferring and communication of En

Energy is p ur e ly e n talM
e rgy is the remembrance of the fact that the

Be it Gravitation
Affinity or Attraction on the on e hand or
,
.

—
,

Light Heat Magnetism or Electricity on the

, ,

othe r— it is all Mental Force Attraction in all

.

of its forms has been reco gnized as Mental Ac

tion An d the v ibar tion s that cause Li ght

.
,

Heat Magnetism and Electricity have been

,

seen to result from the Law of Attraction an d , ,

therefore are Mental This being the case

,
.
,

would it not be wise fo r us to look fo r a solution

of the trans m i ssion of Force and Ene r gy in the
r egio n from which it originated the — M
e n tal

R egion ? D oes not thi s seem reaso n able ? Should

!

not the explanation for Mental E ffects be

sought in a Me n tal Cause ? An d should n ot th e
1 60
 THE THE O RY OF DYN AMI C THOUGHT
medium between Mind and Mind be looked for
in the Mental Regio n ?
Taking the liberty of peeping into some of
the succeedi ng chapters of this book g e ttin g a
—

little ahead of the story as it were let us con

—
,

side r the operation of Mind in the higher fo rms

of Life Without argument or proof at this
.
,

point let us remembe r the well founded state

,
-

ments of fact and the ol d occ ul t teachi ngs as

—

well that the Mind is not confined to the li mi ts

—

‘
of the body but extends as an Aura fo r some ”
,

distance beyond the physical form Let us also .

remember the phenomena gro uped together

“
under the gene r al subject of Tho ught trans -

“ ”
ference ,
Thought tra n smission Tele ,
” “ ”
pathy or ( the best t e rm of all ) Telesthesia
,
“
( meaning lite r all y fa r ofi
,
-
The
writer ima gines that he hea r s the yell of derision
g o up at this point from the mate rialistic per
“ ”
son ag e or , man on the street who has been ,

induced to read thi s book by some well meaning

“
friend . Thou ght transference Fiddlesti cks
-

we may hear him cry i n imaginatio n But let

,
.

this reader r emember— Fiddlestick s or n o Fid ,

dl e sticks that
— Thought trans m ission is a -

proven fac t and that thousan ds of people

—

kn ow it to be so ab solutely from thei r own e x

, , .

p e r ie n ce It is.too late i n the da y for s n eers at

the mentio n of the term .

161
 DYN AMI C THO U GHT
Well then since Force is Mental and we are
, , ,

looking for a Mental explanation fo r the phe n o

menon of Tran smission of Forc e does it not ,

seem natu r al to co n side r Thought t r a n smissio n -

in that connection ? An swering a possib l e oh

j e ctio n of some critical r eader to the e ffe c t that ,
“ ”
before a sensation may be received the r e ,
-

“ ”—
ce iv e r m u st have sense o rgans a v e ry good-

objection but on e that is answered b y Scie nce

,

itself let us read on

— .

Haeckel the distin gui shed scientist in hi s

, ,
’
endeavor to prove that Ma n s senses a r e but a
development of something in inorganic life has ,

c alled our attention to the fact that Molecules ,

“ ”
and Atoms a r e capable of r eceivi n g se n sa
,
“ ”
tions and responding thereto He makes .

quite a poin t of this in hi s latest works a n d r e ,

marks among many other things showing his

,
“
positive views on the subject of sensatio n in
” “
the inorganic world I cann ot im agine the
sim p l e st che m ical an d h
p y sical p r oc e ss w ithou t
attribu ting the m ov e m e n ts of the m ate rial p ar
”
ticl e s to un con scious s e n sation ; and again
“ ‘ c on sis ts in the
The ide a o f che m ical afilnity

fact that the v arious che m ical e l e m en ts p e rceiv e

the q ualitativ e dif
f e r e n c e s in othe r e l e m e n ts

i n
‘l e asur e ’ or ‘
r e v ulsion
’
at con tact
ex p e r e ce p
with the m , an d ex e cute sp e ci
fi c m ov e m e n ts on
”
this gr oun d He . also quotes app r ovingl y the
, ,

1 62
 THE TH E OR Y OF DYN AMIC TH O UG HT
r e m a rks of N ageli who said,
If the m ole
cul es p oss e ss s om e thing that is re l ate d, how e v e r
dis tan tly, to se nsation, it m us t be com f or tabl e
to be abl e to f oll ow the ir attr action s an d re p ul
sion s ; un com f or tabl e w he n the y ar e f or c e d to
”
do oth e rwis e Haecke l als o say s that i n his
.

opinion the s e nsation s in anim al an d p lan t lif e

“
are c on n e cte d by a l ong s e rie s of e v olu tion ary

s tag e s with th e sim p l e r f or m s of s e n sation that

w e fin d in the in org anic e l e m e n ts, and that r e

”
v e al th e m s e lv e s in che m ical afi inity Is n ot .

this st r ong enough ? Perhaps we may n ow be

“ ”
permitted at least to as sume that even the
“
Atoms Molecules and Corpuscles have some
,
”
thing like sensation .

Some one ma y now object that Hae ck e l

“ ”
speaks of contact between the particles a n d ,

that sensatio n by contact ( eve n i n a n atom ) is

fa r di fferent from s e nsatio n without c o n tact at ,

a short distance ! uite right bu t if the ob

.
,

j e ct o r will take the trouble to re view the teach

in gs of Science r egar ding the r elation of the
P artic l es he wil l see that th e P a r ti c les a r e
,
“ ”
ne v e r ex actly in con tact ex cept i n mome n ts
,

of c o l lisio n whi c h b y the wa y the y c a r ef ully

, , ,

avoid The Corpuscles as we have shown have

.
, ,
“ ”
p l e n ty fo r oom in w hich to m ov e a bou t and ,

they mov e i n o rbits a r o un d each othe r Th e .

Atoms c omb ine but the r e is always r oom be

,
'

163
 DYN AMIC TH O UGHT
twe e n the m ,
as may be seen by reference to the
“ ” “
teachings regarding the Ether whi ch fills ,
”
up the cracks according to the theory An d .

”
the Molecules also hav e p l e n ty of r oom as ,

may be see n by r eferen c e to that pa r t of the

subject particularly to the comparison of the
,

drop of water magnified to the size of the Earth ,

in which the Molecul es wo uld appea r about the

size of the ori ginal drop with m ore room be
tw e e n e ach than th e ir own siz e .

In fact as we have bee n sho wn in a previo u s

,

chapter the particles a r e att r a c ted only to a

,

certain distance at which they r esist the im

,
“ ”
pulse or attraction and stand off a bit The y .

will not be forced too nea r without cr eatin g dis

turbance s and manifestations of fo r ce and if
, ,

they a r e separate beyo n d a ce r tain distance the

attra c tive powe r ceases to Operate But the re .

is always s om e r oom be tw e e n the m and they ,

bridge over that room and exert and receive

the attractive powe r in som e way Thi s is true .

n ot only of the particles b ut of the gr eat bodies ,

l ik e the Earth a n d planets that are attracted

, ,

an d attra c t ove r gr eat distances N ow for the .

“
question How do the y exert sen se and at
t r a c tive powe r over the great comparative dis
tanc e gr eat compa r atively as well in atom as
—
, , ,

i n planet and s un ?
Some one may an swer the qu estio n closin g
1 64
 THE THE O RY OF DYN A MI C TH O UGHT
the last paragraph with the word El e c tricity .

“
Very good E l ectricit y like the
—
, Ether,
comes in qui t e ha n dy when on e is forced to ex
“ ”
plain s omethi ng n ot kn own Electricity
.
,
“ “ ’
like the Glacial Period Aristotle s
,
” “ ” “ ”
Ether ,
N atural Laws , and Suggestion ,

is a most handy weapon of argument and often ,

acts as a preventative to further inquiry a n d

investigation until s ome s ufficiently ir r everent
“
of precedent arises to ask But Why and
,

How ? and starts the ball rolling again .

“ ”
But Electricity will not answer in thi s
“ ”
case for the r ate of the travel of Electricity
,

is well known m iles per second which , ,

“
fast as it is ass umes the crawl of a slow
,
” “
freight when compared with the instan
tan e ous rate of t r avel of G r avitation And .

then E lectricity r e qui r es a “

medi um and
G r av i tation does n ot a n d i n man y oth er way s
,

the two a r e see n to be totally di ffe r e n t An d i n .

'

the c ase of th e Space between the Atom a n d

Mol e cule a n d Co rpusc l e it is n o mo r e r easo n
,
“ ”
abl e to say Electricity tha n it wo uld be to
“ “
say H eat or Light ; a n d M agn etism is
” ” “ ”

n ot availabl e fo r o bv io u s r easo n s Remembe r .

that E lec t ri c ity L i ght a n d Heat a re cause d by

,

M otio n r es ul tin g f r om Attraction a n d the child

,

cann ot p r ocr e ate the

p ar e n t H
. e at Light a n d,

El ec t ri c ity ma y b e get each other ( and the y do) .

1 65
 DYN AMIC THOUGHT
‘
An d G ra v i tation ma y p r ocreate Heat Light a nd ,

Elec tricity B ut Heat Light and Electricity

.
,

cann ot p r oc r e ate G rav itation — N eve r ! A n d

Light H eat an d Ele c t ricity requir e r eplenish
,

ing from the c ommo n so urce of Energy but ,

G ravitatio n is sel f sufficie n t and ask s n o re

-

plenishin g or storag e batte ry o r powe r ho u se

- -
.

Ele c tricity Heat and Li ght c ome a n d go ap

, ,

pea rin g manifesting a n d disapp ea r in g swal

, ,

lowed up by each othe r or b y Substance B ut, .

—
Gravitatio n is a lways the r e unc hangeable
unwav eri n g immutable in va riable
Something abo v e Matte r a n d Fo rce something
—

majesti c awe in spi rin g s ublime ! D oes it take

,
-

a wild flight of the imaginatio n to see that this

Somethin g that i s n ot Matter and no r Fo r ce
,

m us t be a m anif e station of in d? M
Let u s fir st appl y thi s idea of Tho ught trans
,

-
,

ference to the ope r atio n of the Law of Att r a e

tio n betwee n the Co rp u scl e s Atoms a n d Mole
,

cul es of Substan c e— the Parti cl es of Substan ce .

The pa r ticles are believed to mov e to or awa y

fr om ea c h othe r in ac c ordance with the work
ings of Att r actio n an d Affinity i n its va rious ,

d e gr e e s Fi r st the y mu st de sir e to move— n ot

.

D es ire in the developed sen se that we feel it ,

“ ” “
but sti ll eleme n tary feelin g or inclin a
,
” “ ”—
tio n
, or tenden cy call it what yo u will ,

but i t r ema in s rudimentary Mental Emotio n

166
 THE T HE ORY OF D YN A M I C THO UGH T
an E moti o n le adin g to M oti on
-
( Thi s is n ot a .

p u n — l oo k u p th e m e a ni n g of the wo r d Emo
ti o n a n d you wil l se e its app l i c atio n ) .

The n followin g th e D esi r e c om e s the a c tio n

, ,

in th e di r e c tio n of g r atify ing it Th e Pa r ti c les .

a c t to g r atif y D esir e in two wa y s a c tin g at a

—
“
distance r ememb er they exer t the Attrac
—

M
,

tive Fo r ce whi c h the w ri te r beli ev e s to be M e n

,

tal Fo rc e tran sm itte d by in d p r oj e ction a

, , ,

m en tal or ps ychi c bo nd or c o nn e c tio n b eing thus

established B y m ea n s of thi s b o n d of Mind
.
,

the P a rticl e en deavo r s to ( 1 ) d r aw itself to the

obj ect ; and ( 2 ) to d r aw the o b je c t towa r d its elf .

In the c as e of the M o l ec ul e this D esire a n d ,

M ov em en t seems to b e mu tual a nd evidenc ed

M
,

by a n d to al l Mole cule s a like p rov iding the y be

,

within ol e cul ar Distan ce as S c i e nce ca l ls it

,
.

B ut i n the c as e of the Atoms i t seems to b e ,

di ffe re n t for the re i s fo un d a gre at er degree

—
“ ” ” “
of choi c e or el e c tiv e aflinity
, Thi s el ec .

” “ ”
ti o n or c hoi ce is n ot altogeth er f r ee b u t ,

dep end s upo n th e r el ativ e l ik es an d dislik e s of

“ ”
ce r tai n kin ds of el eme n ts a s we have see n ,

in p re v mus c hapte r s a l tho ugh to be s ur e these

, , ,
“ ”
El e m en ts a re al l made out of th e same st uff
in di ffe ren t c ombinati o n s .

The detai l s of Co rp u s cul a r Att r a c tio n are n ot

“
kn own so it c a nn ot be told whethe r p r efer
,
”
e n ce s exi st, or whether ( in the wo r ds of the
1 67
 DYN AMIC T H OUGHT
“ ”
street ) all Corpuscles l ook a l ik e to each
othe r It wo ul d app e a r however that there
.
, ,

m u st be some reaso n s for p r eference among ,

the Corp u scles else they wo uld always form in

,

the same combinations— always act alike to

each othe r as they a r e alike i n other a c tions
,

an d thus there would be but on e Element or

kind of Atom formed instead of the s e v e n ty

, ,

fi v,e already kn own T o be sure.i n this case , ,

it m ight be that the on e kin d of Atom formed

would be the Atom of Hy d r oge n a n d that all ,

othe r Eleme n ts or Atoms we r e mo dific ations

, ,

o f that o e
n — just provin g the dream of the Sci
entists of the N ineteenth Centu ry But a s Kip .
,
“ ”
ling would say that is anothe r sto ry
, .

T o r etu rn to the Particle whi c h we left t ryin g

to d r aw the other Parti c le to itself a n d itself ,

towa r d the other Ther e is n o m ate rial con

.

ne ction betwee n them ( a n d Elect ricit y a n d

M agnetism will n ot an swer ) so what is to be ,

done ? Evidently the Parti cle kn ows for it ex

M
,
“ ”
erts a drawing p owe r or f orce by m e an s of
the e n tal con n e ction and tw o c ome to g ether
-
, ,

Th e Pa r ticl e evidentl y is able to ex ert a repel

“ ”
l in g or moving awa y power by r eve r si n g the
p r ocess the Mental bond actin g as the medi um
,
-
.

This ma y c a u se a smile be c a u se we have n ever ,

see n a n i n stance of bodi es p ullin g themselves

“ ” ’
togethe r b y in ta ngi bl e bo n ds Hav e n t we ? .

1 68
 THE THEOR Y OF DYN AMIC TH O UGHT
Th en how about two pieces of magnetised steel ,

or two elect r ified s ubstances ? O h that s difl e r

’
,

ent y ou say Why diffe r cut? I s n t th e bond

, .
’
,
’
in tangibl e ? And haven t we se en that both
,

Electricity and Magnetism we re Me n tal Actions

’
also ? O h e r b u t well , oh ye s that s it
— —
,
—
,

p erhaps the Att r a c ting Fo r c e is Mag n etism or

Electricity No that will n ot do, for we have

.
,

s een that Ele c t r icit y a n d Magnetism we r e p r od

ucts of thi s Attraction not p r odu ce rs of it ,

— the
Attractio n must come be f or e Ele c tricity and
M agnetism n ot af te r them you a r e mixing
,
—

Ca u se and Efi e ct An d even if you we r e r ight

.
,
’
—a n d y o u can n ot be— wouldn t the Ele c trical

dir e cte d by th e M
or Magneti c Force be call e d in to op e r ation an d

e n tal Action a r ising from the

D esire ? You cann ot get awa y f r om Mental

,
,

Action when you st u dy the Law of Att r actio n .

“
But h ow about the fact that Heat caus e s
,

the Parti c les to change their vib r ations and ,

draw apart and all that sort of thing— and

,
” “
Electricity likewis e ? you ma y as k
, Surely .

this takes the matte r awa y from Mental Action ,

’ ”
does n t it ? Well the wr ite r thinks that the,

phenomeno n r efe rr ed to only helps to prove his

theo ry An d he wil l e n deavo r to so prove to
.

y ou .

The co n side r atio n of the fa c ts r elated in thi s

chapte r l eads u s to a supplemen tal p r oposition
,

1 69
 DYN AMIC THOUGHT
to our B as i c Proposition whi ch may b e state d
,

follows
M
M
as

S U PPLE E N TAL P R OP O SITI ON I Not only is the

—

M
.

Law of Attraction the m anif e station of a e n

tal P r oce ss, or Vital -
e n tal Ac tion ; bu t also the
actual For ce or En e rgy use d in bringin g the
P ar ticl e s fo Su bs tan ce in cl ose r re l ation , in

Vital M
accor dan ce with that Law is in its n atu r e a
,

e n tal For ce or En e rgy, op e rating be

twe e n bodie s or p ar ticl e s of Su bs tan ce , withou t

a m ate rial m e dium .

17 0
 C HAP TER XII

T H E LAW OF I RA N T E N ER GY
V B

N p rev i o u s chapt er s w e hav e s een that the

I phenomen a Of Radian t E n ergy kn own as ,

Light Heat Magnetism a n d Ele c tricity had

, , ,

thei r o rigi n in the Motio n Of the Pa r ti cl es the ,

di ffe r ent c l asses of phenomena dep en din g u po n

the partic ul ar degree and nat ur e of th e afo r e
said Motio n Of Particles .

We have seen also that Radiant E n e r gy c o ul d

be c omm uni c ate d or trans mitted f r om one body
Of Substan c e to a n othe r And that the com
.

m un ication Of t r a n smission mi ght b e accom

p l ish e d n ot onl y b y c lose contact of th e b odies ,
“ ”
but by waves Of some so r t which we re c a u s e d
“ ”
in some medi um ( the Ethe r ) b y th e v ibr a
tions of the Pa r ti cle s of the body a nd which ,
“
waves , when they r eached the othe r body ,

we re t r a n sfo rm ed in t o v ib r atio n s of th e Par

ticl e s c o rr esponding to those ma n ifeste d in th e
fi r st body The idea has b e en ill u st r ate d by the
.

sendin g tel ephone th e so un d wave s in the

,

diaph r agm of which we r e t r a n sfo rm ed in to

17 1
 DYN AMIC THOUGHT
waves of the Electric current and thus passin g ,

alon g the wires were transformed a gain into

sound waves b y the diaphra gm of the receiving
-

instrument .

We have seen also in the preceding chapte r

, ,

that the medium by whi ch these vibrations were

transferred transmitted or c om m un l cate d
, , ,

mi ght be supposed to be Mind the operation ,

being akin to T hought transference N ow let -

.

us examine into the workin g s of the matter .

In the first place we assum e a certai n state of

,

vibration existin g in a certain body of Sub

,
'

stance Heat or Electricity for instance ( either

—
,

illustration will answer ) An other body of .

Substance is brought in close contact with the

first body and the vibrations O f Energy pass
,
“ ”
on to the second not by waves but by a seem
,

ing actual passing of vibrations without the

”
n eed of intervening waves This Sci en c e .
,

calls transmission by Conduction the theo ry ,

“ ”
being that the particles rapidly pass on the
vibrations f r om on e to another Convection or .

conduction alon g other forms of Substance ,

such as hot air hot water steam etc is but a

-

.
,
- -

,
.
,

variation of the above as Substance is th e ,

medi um in both cases The thi rd form of trans .

mission is by Radiation whereby the vibrations ,

“ ”
a r e tra n smitted by waves in some medi um
other than Substance ( according to the theo ry ) ,

17 2
 THE LA W OF V IBR A N T E N ERG Y .

as we hav e described in a preceding pa r ag r aph ,

as well as in previous chapters As a matte r

of fact a careful analysis O f the matte r wil l
,
“ ”
show that even i n the Conductio n of the
most solid Substance there must be a m e dium
,
”
n ot Su bs tan ce between the Particles of the
S ub stan ce for the P ar ticl e s a lways hav e Sp ace
,

be tw e e n t e m thi s being true Of the Particles

h —

O f Ai r as w ell as those of Iron

, So the r e is .

alway s Sp ace to be tr av e r s e d by a m e dium n ot

”
Su bs tan ce . But we need not stop to split
hai r s regarding this question fo r the general,

e x planatio n wi l l explain thi s also .

N ow to g et back to ou r body O f Sub stan c e

,

v ib rating w ith Radiant Energy separated from ,

a s ec o n d bod y of Substance by a g reat distance

-
tho u sa n ds of miles in fact millions would
—

be bette r l et u s take two worlds for instance

—
,

-
the Sun a n d the E arth Ignoring fo r the
.

moment th e e xplanation Of Gravitations ( which

will be give n l ater ) and r ealizing that the r e is
n o m e dium of Su bs tan c e e x isting between the

two bodies w e must grant that there is a

,
“ ”
m e dium n ot Substan ce e xisting betwee n
them either p ermanently or thrown out for the
,

purpose of this special trans m issio n We shall .

assume a medium existing befo r e the need of

the tra n smission ( for reasons to be seen later ) .

O ur Theory Of D yn amic Thou ght and Thought ,

17 3
 DYN AMIC T H O U G H T
T r a n sfe r enc e between b odies Of S ubstanc e c om

M
pel s us to s uppos e that this medi um is a en tal
Conn e ction, or e ntal R e lation, e x isting be
M
,

tw e en the two bodies of Substan ce SO , we m u st

.

c o n side r the qu estio n of this medi um of Min d

transmitting the vib r ati o n s Of Radiant Energy
f r om the S un to the Earth How c a n Min d c on
.

duct Radiant Ene r gy ? I t doe s n ot con duct

R adian t En e rgy but it does transm it n ot

cause s
—
,

Radiant Energy bu t the M —

e n tal State that

R adian t En e rgy Vibra tions .

“
This stat e men t Of a Mental State c ausin g
R adian t E n ergy Vib r atio n s ”
seems r athe r
sta r tlin g at fir st s i ght— but let u s examine it .

We hav e seen that the R adia n t Ener gy was

c a u sed by the Motio n or Vib r ations of the Pa r
ticl e s whi ch Motio n or Vib r ation was the r e
,

sul t Of the wo rkin gs Of the Law of Attractio n ,

and whic h Law was b u t th e ma n ifestati on of

Vital M e n ta l Actio n
-
. An d at the l ast th e
, ,

Vi bratio n s of Radia n t Energy are the r esult

“ ”
Of pec ulia r or pa r ticula r states Of the Life
“ ”
and Mind of the P a r ticle The word State is
.

derived f r om the Lati n wo r d Status mea n in g ,

“ ”
pos i tio n ; sta ndin g a n d is u s e d gener ally in
,
“ ”
the se n s e of co n di ti on .

This M en ta l Stat e of the P a r ticl e m ay be

“
desc ribed as a stat e of Em otional Ex cite
”
m en t. L e t us p a u se a moment to c o n s i de r th e
17 4
 T HE LAW OF VIBRA N T E N ER GY .

mea n in g of these wo r ds it Often helps us to —

un de r sta n d a s ubje c t if we e xamin e the r ea l

,
“ ”
meanin g Of the wo rds d efin i n g it Emotio n .

is de r ived f r om the Latin word Em otum mea n ,

“ ” —
in g to shake ; to sti r up the Latin wo rd
being made up of tw o other wo r ds i e E
meaning
“
“ ”
out ; and
“
otum

Emotion is defined as a movi n g or e x cite

“
M
to move
,
”
, . .
,

.
,

” “ ”
ment Of th e mi nd . Excitement is derive d
“
f r om the Lati n wo r d Ex citar e meanin g to ,
” —
mo v e out the Engli sh word being defin ed as
“
a c allin g to Activity ; state of Active feeling ;

M
”
a r o u sed Activity . SO y o u see that the i d e a
Of Activ e otion a n d Ar ouse d Activ ity of
, ,
“
M in d pe rmeat e s the te rm Emotio n al Ex c it e
,
”
m en t that is u sed b y the w rite r i n co nn ectio n
,

with the Me n ta l State c a u si n g v ib r ation of th e

“
P a r ticl es of S ubstanc e The single word E x
.
,
”
cite m e nt , will b e u sed by the w rite r hereafte r , ,

in the a b o v e c o nn e c ti o n i n orde r to av oid com

,

ple x te rms To thos e who stil l Obje c t to th e use

.

of a me n ta l t erm in r efe r e n ce to motio n of S ub

sta nc e he might r ema rk that S c ience mak es use

,
“ ”
Of the t er m a n d E xc itemen t
in r ef er e nce to E l e c t rical phe n ome n a so that ,

he is n ot altoge the r witho u t s uppo r t in th e use

of th e word .

Now to ret urn again to our b ody Of S ub stance

— t h e S un— th e P a r ticles of w hic h are manif e st
17 5
 DYN A MI C TH OUGHT
“ ”
ing a great degree of Excitement evide n cing ,

in Vib r ations p r oducing the phen omeno n Of

Radian t Energy The ex c itement is shared
‘
.

’
equally by its Particles the c onta gio n having ,

sp r ead among them Eve n the Particles of its .

atmosphere are vibrating with Excitement an d ,

evidencin g Radiant Energy The S un is i n .

direct Mental Co nne c tion with the Earth ( as

we shall see p r esently ) and the E xcitement is
transmitted by Thought Transference ( along -

this Mental Connection ) in the shape of D yna

mi c Thought waves of Excitement These waves
-
.

have a rate of speed of miles pe r sec

on d — why thi s particula r r ate or any rate at ,

all is n ot apparent ; it being ve ry evident how

, ,

ever that this particular kind of Mental Action

,

— E x citeme n t or Thou ght— is not transmitted

,

in stan tan e ously as is the Menta l ! uality kn own

as D esire r esultin g in Attraction or Gravita
, ,

tion which seems to be rather a Basic quality

, ,

rathe r tha n a tempora ry disturbance or emo

tion al ex citement But the writer must not get
.

ahead of his sto ry .

The Excitement of the P articles O f Substance

“
composi n g the S un is contagious and the ,

Tho ught waves t r avel along the Men tal Con

-

n e ction or medi um
,
at a wonderful r ate Of ,

speed Soon th e y c ome in contact with the Men

.

tal Atmosphe r e of the Earth and the E xcite

17 6
 THE LAW OF V IBRA N T E N ERG Y .

me n t be c omes m a nifest i n Ac tio n th e Em o ,

tion al E x citement bein g r eproduced b y the P a r

’
ticl e s of the Ea r th s S ubstan c e n ea r est the sur
face whic h v i br ate a n d ma n ifest the R a di a n t
Energy in spite Of themselves for the tendency ,
“ ”
among Partic les is to settle down and r e ,
”
main c alm , r athe r than to pa r ti c ipate in
Emotio n al E x citemen t The y have a cquired a
.

n ormal a n d fix ed r ate of Vib r atio n or Me n ta l ,

State afte r many y ea r s g r adually changing

, ,

f r om a high state Of Excitement to a c ompa r a ,

tive c alm state And thei r tendency a n d in

.
,

clin ation is Co n s ervative a n d they a r e disposed

,

to r esent a n d r epel Radi c a l stat e s of E xc ite

m en t or D ist urba nce c omin g fr om oth er le ss
,

Co n se rv ativ e B odi e s .

The a b o v e fa c t pa rtially ex p l a in s why the

c omm uni c at ed E xc iteme n t manifests itse lf mo re
“ ”
st r o n gl y on the su rfa c e of the body e xposed
tothe c o n tagi o n of E xc itement T he Co n serva .

tiv e i nfl ue nc e is alwa y s at work a nd manage s ,

to a b so rb a nd equ a l l y di st ri bu te th e E n e rgy
that is b eatin g down upo n it witho u t allowin g ,

i t to pen et r ate v ery fa r Th e E n ergy is u sed up

.
-

or a b sorbed an d neu t r a li z ed b y th e low er vib r a

,

tio n s of the M ass The e ffo r t of the E n e r gy

.

“ ”
coming f r om the s endin g Body is to b ri n g up -

the vib r atio n s Of the r e ce iv in g body to the rate

of the se n de r ; whil e th e e ffo r t of the recei v in g
17 7 .
 DYN AMIC THO U GHT
body is to r esist this e ffort and to r educ e a n d ,
“ ”
b rin g down the t r ansmitted incr eased r ate
-

of v ibratio n of the Pa r ticles immedi atel y e x

posed to the c ontagion In both cases the e ffo r t
.

“ ”
is toward equalization of the rat e of vi bra
tions T hi s wo rk ing of the law may be Obse rv ed
.

plainl y in the c ase of H e at vib r ations th e —

“ ”
Energy se e ming to wish to bring up the -

v ib r atio n s or tempe r at ur e of the se c ond bod y ,

while th e latte r r esists this e fi ort and strives ,

“ ”
to b rin g down the vib rations or temperatu r e
-

“
of those Pa rti cl es of itse l f that ha v e ca ught
”
the Motio n The E n ergy is lik e a Radical
.

Agitato r who wishes to sti r up a n Excitement ,

“
leading to a change while th e B ody is like
”
,
“
the Conse rv ative elemen t that p re fe r s to let
”
well e no ugh alone and r esists the sti rr ing up
,
-

p r oc ess a n d ex e r ts itself to restore quiet and

, ,

to main tai n ac c ustomed conditio n s .

The e xplanation Of the phenomen on give n in

a ny work on Physics or N atural Philosophy will
a n swe r fairl y well i n the co n side r ation Of thi s
Theory of Dyn amic Tho ught the only import ,

a n t chan ge b e i n g requi r e d being the substitu

,
“ ” “
tio n of Tho ught waves for Waves of th e
-

”
Ethe r of S c ien ce Scien ce has des cribed the
.

”
workin g Op eratio n s as might be e xpe c ted
,

f r o m he r yea r s of c a r eful study and e x a min a

tion S h e has e rred o nly i n th e The o ry or
.

17 8
 TH E LAW OF VIBR A N T E N ER G Y .

Hypothesis advanced to acco un t for the facts .

“ ”
Her Ether ha n ded down b y A ristotl e is ad ,
“
m itte d b y he r to be pa r ado xical a n d un thin k
” —
able but she has had no ne othe r to s ubstit ute
for it She will probably s n ee r at the Dynami c
.

Thou ght and Thought Transfere nc e th e o ry ad

,
-

v an c e d in this book — if indeed she takes the

trouble to ex amine it B ut sometim e f r om he r
.
,

own ranks — among he r most advanced mem

“
bers will arise a ma n who will claim that All
—

” “
Fo r ce is Mental Force and that T r an sfe r
,
”
ence Of Energy is Thought Transfe r ence .

An d the Scientific World will accept the do c

trine after it fin ds itself un able to fight it down
— and it will give new names and terms to its
workings .And it will proclaim loudly the
“ ”
new T ruth And this littl e book, a n d its
.

w riter will be ignored b u t its work wil l go on

— .

The writer although probabl y doom e d to have

himself and his theory la ughed at by the masses
of people ( whose chi ldren will accept the teach

in gs Of this book ) does n ot feel disco ur aged b y

the p r ospect He ca r es n othing fo r pe r so n al
.

cr edit— the truth be in g the importan t thi n g .

Lik e G alv ini ( whose words appea r on the title

,
“
page of this book ) he ma y cry ! I am attacke d
by two v e ry op p osite s e c ts— the s cie n tists an d

the kn ow n othings
m e the
.
‘
Fr o
-

g
’
s
.

D ancing
17 9
M
B oth l aug h
as te r,
at
’
m e, calling

but I kn ow
 DYN A M IC THO U GHT
that I hav e discov e r e d on e o f the g re ate st
Force s in Natur e .
”

The ill u stration given above of the tra n smis

sion Of the E x citement Of the Pa r ticles of the
'

S un to the Particles Of the E arth ; will answ er

e qually well in the case of Light Heat Magnet , ,

ism a n d Electrici ty An d it will answe r in the

.

c ase of the t r ansmission of these Fo rces be

twee n Atoms Molecules and Masses as wel l as
, ,

betw e en Wo rlds and S ola r S ystems Any .

bodies s ubject to the Law of Attractio n ma y

an d do s o t ra n smit Vibrations In our con
, .

“ ”
side r ati o n of The Riddle of the Sphinx ,

which fo rms the subj ect O f the nex t chapt er w e ,

shall Obtain fu rthe r particula r s Of the wo rkin gs

of the Law .

The co n side ratio n of the facts and princ ipl es

stated i n thi s chapter b rin g s us to a second S up
p l e m e n tal P r oposition wh i ch may
, be stated as
follows
M
S U PPLE E N TAL P R OP O SITI ON II The rate s of
—

M
.

v ibration of the P ar ticl e s of Su bstan ce m ay be

“ ”
like n e d to State s ; an d a high degre e
e n tal
”
of the sam e m ay be cal l e d an Ex cite m e n t .

“
This Ex cite m e n t m ay be , and is, com m uni
cate d fr om th e P ar ticl e s of the body m anif est

ing it, to the Par ticl e s of othe r bodies the

M
m e dium of such com m unication be ing a
—

e n tal

Connection or en tal R e lation ex isting be twe en

M
180
 THE LAW OF VI B RA N T E N E R G Y .

'

the two bodie s of S u bs ta n ce , w ith o u t th e e m

l
p y o m e n t of ya n m a te ria l m e d iu m — an d w h ic h
Ex cite m e n t, so com m unicate d, rep r oduce s in the
s econ d body the v ibration s m anif e ste d in the

fir s t b o dy, su b j ,
e ct al w a s
y , t o th e c ou n ter a cti ng
ef f o t o f t h on d b o d to m a in ta in it a o

M
r s e se c y s

custom e d, an d f or m e r, r ate of v ibration, an d

e n tal State .

18 1
 CHAPTER XIII

TH E RIDDLE OF THE SP HI N X

T is with no li ght emotion or j a un ty air

I that the writer approaches this part of his
, ,

subject O n the contra ry he feels somethin g

.
,

like awe when he co n templates the nature of

that gr eat S omething which he is called upon
“ ”
to attempt to explain in a few pages He .

feels in only a lighter de g ree the emotion that

, ,

on e experiences when in o c casional moments

, ,

hi s mind leads to a contemplation Of The In

fin ite He feels that that which men mean whe n
.

“ ” “ ”
they say Gravitation and The Ether are ,

b ut symbols and feeble concepts of Somethi ng

so far above human experience that the Mind

Of Man may grasp only its lowest shadings the ,

g reater and hi gher part of it like the hi gher ,

rays of the Spectrum being hidden from the ex

,

p e r ie n ce of Man .

In his endeavo r to pass on to you his ideas

regarding the S omething that explains both
“

Gravitation and the Ether he mu st ask y ou to

,
“
endeavor to form a Mental Picture Of a Some
”
thing . This Something must fill all Space
18 2
 TH E RI DD L E OF TH E S P HI NX
within the Li mi ts Of the U niverse or Cos m o s ,

if lim i ts it has It m u st be a n e xpression of the

.

fir st of the att rib utes Of The Infin ite th e on e —

c alled O mn ip r esen c e or P r esenc e ever ywhe r e

,
-

and y e t it m ust n ot be The I nfinite P r e se n ce It .

also
,
m u st be a n expression of the se c ond o f the
attributes of the Infin ite the one c alled Cm
—

n ip ote n ce or All Power

,
- — and y e t it m ust n ot be
T he I nfinite P owe r It a l so must be an exp r es
.

sion of the third att ribute of The In fin ite the —

on e called O mniscience or All Knowing — a n d

,
-

y e t i t m u s t n ot b e T he I n fin ite W is d om It m .u st
be a n expressio n of All the Attributes that we
think of as belonging to The In fin ite an d y e t —

thr oug h the m All w e m ay s e e The I nfinite ,

I ts e lf, in th e backg r oun d, v ie wing its ex p r e s

sion s .

This Something that you are asked to thin k

of is that Something r egarding which the mys

tics have dreamed ; the p hi losophers have spe e n

lated ; the scientists have sneered a n d s miled
that S omething that Men have tho ught of as
The Universal Mind or the Cos mi c Mind .

Y ou are asked to think Of this Somethin g

as a g r eat O cea n of Pure Mind pe rmeating ,

all Space betwee n Solar Systems between

— —

Worlds betwee n Masses of Substance be

— —

twee n the Molecules Atoms and Corpuscles

, ,
.

In and abo u t and aroun d ever ything y es even

—
,

18 3
 DYN AMIC THOU G HT
in Eve rythin g in the very essence of the Co r
—

p u scl e it is — in truth i t is t ha t E sse n c e i tse l f .

Bound u p in the bosom of that Mighty O cean

of Mind must reside all Knowledge of the Uni
“ ”
verse Of all thi s side of G od
— For that .

All Kn owledge is but a knowing Of its own r e

-

gion Latent within itself must be locked up

.

all Energy or capacity for Force or M otion

, ,

for all Force or Ener gy is Mental In its very .

presence it exemplifies the capacity of filling All

Space O mn ipresent ; O m nipotent ; O m niscient
.

— all the attributes of The Infin ite a r e mani

fe ste d i n it an d y e t it is bu t th e ou tward ex

p r e ssi on o f T h a t B e hi n d th e V e
-
il w h i ch -
is t h e -

Cause l e ss Cause of Al l .

In that G r eat O cean Of Universal o r Cosmic

Mind bodies of Substance are but as floatin g
,

specks Of dus t — or e v en bu bbl e s f orm e d of the

su bs tan ce of t at O e
h c a n i ts e lf — on the su rface

of that O cean there may arise waves currents

, , ,

ripples eddies whirlpools storms hurricanes

, , ,
-

, ,

tempests from its bosom may rise vapor that

—
, ,

after stages Of clouds rain drops flowing in ,

-

streams rivers bay s at last again reach the

, , ,

source of its origin These disturbances and .

changes we call Ene rgy Force Motion but —

, ,

they a r e b ut su rface ma n ifestations and the ,

Great O c ean is serene in its depths a n d i n , ,

reality is un changed and un disturbed

, .

18 4
 THE RI DD LE OF THE S P HI NX
This friends is that whi ch the write r asks
, ,
’
y ou to accept in the place O f A r istotle s Eth er .

Is it a worthy exchange ?
“
1 t
I l
i k

We have seen that the Attra c tion of Gravita

tion was di fferent from any othe r so called -

form Of Force and Energy both in its Opera

—

tions and laws , as well as in its constancy and

self support An d that it was di fferent from
-
.

the other forms of Attraction such as Cohesion ,

Chemical Affinity etc And so w e m u st con

,
.
,
“
sider it as more than a me r e Emotional Ex
”
citement in the Mind O f the Particle— that
bubble on the surface O f the O cean An d it .

must be di fferent from the special forms of At

traction manifested by the Atom and Molecule .

It must be a simpler more basic a n d y et a more

, ,

constant and permanent thi ng It m u st e xist .

“
before a n d afte r E x citement ; Vib r ation ; CO

M
”
he sion ; and Chemical Affinit y I t m ust be the .

othe r of the Force s .

Let us imagine the Cosmic Min d as a gr eat

body of Something filling Space instead of as ,

the surface Of the O cean which figure we used ,

j u st n ow either figur e is equally correct T hi s

— .

great Cosmic Mind is to be thought of as fil l

ing Space and containin g within its v olume
,

( O h for a better word ! ) co un tless worlds an d

, ,

suns as well as smalle r bodies of Substance

, .

18 5
 DYN AMIC THO U GHT
These s un s and world and bodies a re appar ,

ently free and unconnected floating in thi s ,

great volume Of Mind But they are not free .

and unconnected they are linked together by

—

a web of lines of Gravitation Each body Of .

Substance has a line reaching out i n a con

tinuou s direction and connecting it with an
,

other body Each body has on e Of such lines

.

“ ’
connectin g it with e ach particular other body .

Consequently each body has countless lines

,

reaching out from it ; some slender and some ,

thick the thickness depending upon the ratio

,
-

of distances maintained by and relative sizes ,

of the particular bodies that it connects

,
T hi s
‘
.

”
system Of lines form a great net work of con -

n e ction s in the volume of Mind cros sing each ,

other at coun tless points ( but not interfering

with each other ) And although the numbe r
.

“ ”
may be said to be co un tless still these lines ,

do not begin to cover the entire dimensions of

Space or of the Mind that fills it The r e are
,
.

great areas of Space enti r ely un touched b y

these lines If one could see the system of lines
.
,

it probably would appear as a sheared O fi sec

’
tion of a great spider s web with lines in all ,
“ ”
directions but with plenty of r oom between
,

the lines P e rhap s the s e lin e s conv e rg e to a

.

c om m on c e n tr e , an d that ce n tr e m ay be — I
B u t this is transcendental dreaming— let us
18 6
 THE RI DD L E OF TH E S P H I NX
p r o cee d with our co n side r atio n of the use of
these li n es .

It is to be un d er stood of c o ur s e that these

, ,
”
lines ar e n ot m ate rial lin es n ot made of
—
‘
Substan c e but rather c onditions in the Cos
—
,

mi c Mind N ot Tho ught wav es a rising from

.
-

the Excitement of Particles b ut Somethin g ,

mo r e basic simpler a n d mo r e pe rmane nt Let

, , .

u s look closer and we will se e that th e great

lin es of Gravitation r adiating f r om and c on ,

n e c tin g world with world — s un with pla n et

are really cables composed of m uc h smalle r
lines the finest strands Of whi ch are see n to
,

emanate from each Corpuscle or Pa r ticle of

“ ”
Substanc e the line of Gravitatio n reachi n g
—

from the Ea rth to the Sun being c omposed Of

a mass of tiny strands which c o n ne c t each Pa r
ticl e of on e bod y with each Parti c le of the oth er .

The last anal y sis shows u s that e ach Par ticl e

is con n e cte d with e v e ry othe r P ar ticl e in the
Univ e rse by a lin e of Attraction .

“ ”
The se Lin e s of Attr action ar e what we call
— —
G rav itation p ur el y Menta l in nat ur e Lines _

of Mind Principle in the great vol ume Of mi nd

-
.

These l ines Of Gravitation must have existed

from the cr eatio n Of the Pa r ticle a n d the con ,

n e ction betwee n Particle and Particle s m u st

have existed from the beginning if beginning ,

there was The Particles may have changed

.

18 7
 DYN AMIC THOUGHT
thei r positions and relations in the Universe ,

but the lines have never been broken Whether .

the Particle existed as a free Corpuscle

whether combined as Atom or Molec ule
whether pa rt of this wo rld or s un or planet or ,

that one countless millions of mi les removed

it mattered not . T he Line Of Gravitatio n
always was there between that Particle and
,

every other Particle D istance extended and

.

thinned the line or the reverse as the case

, ,

might be b u t it was there always O bstacles

—
, .

proved no hindrance to passage for the lines ,

passed through the Obstacle Can it not be .

seen that here is the secret Of the fact that no

“ ”
time is required for the passa g e of Gravita
tio n it apparently traveling instantaneously
—
,
“ ”
whereas in fact it does not travel at all
, , .

And does not seem that thi s theory also explains

“ ”
why no medium is required fo r the travel
of Gravitation ? And does it not explain why
”
Gravitation is not a ffected in its passage by
inte rv ening bodies ? Gravitatio n does n ot
“ ” “ ”—
travel or pass it remains constant and ,

ever p r esent between the articles va rying i n ,

degr ee as the distance between the Particles is

inc re ased a n d v ice v e rsa; and i nc reasing and
,
-

decreasi n g i n e ffect according to the numbe r

,

of Particles combining thei r lines of Attraction ,

as in the c ase Of Atom Molecule Mass Wo rl d

, , , .

18 8
 THE RI DD L E OF THE S P HI NX
G r avi tatio n is a Mental Co nn e c tion or B o n d
unitin g the Min d in the seve r al Pa r ticl es , r ather
tha n the i r S ubstan c e or Mate rial .

Al o n g these lines Of G r avitatio n pass the

”
Thought waves -
re sulting from the E xc ite
,

ment of the Particles these fleeting cha n ging

—
, ,

inc onstant waves of Emotion— how di ffe r ent

the y a r e from the changeless c onstan t e x ,

hi bition of Gravitation And along these same.

l ines when shortened by close contact t r avel

—
,

the imp ul ses of Cohesio n and Chemical Affin ity .

G r avitatio n n ot onl y pe rfo rms its own wo rk ,

”
b u t a l so a c ts as a common carrie r for the -

waves of D esire Forc e a n d the Tho ught wav e s

-

,
-

of E x citement Of the Pa r ti c les manifestin g as ,

Attractive Energy a n d R adi a n t E n e rgy re

, ,

sp e ctiv e l y .

The write r asks y ou to remembe r p articu ,

l arly that while the D esire waves of the P a r

,
-

ticl e s — a n d their Tho ught wav e s of E xc ite

,
-

ment are chan geable dis c o n ne c ted a n d incon

—
, ,

co n stant ; the Line of Gravitatio n is n eve r

b r o k en a n d c o uld n ot be un l e ss the P a rt icl e of
,

S ubsta nc e was swept out Of e xisten c e i n whi c h ,

c ase th e balan ce of the Unive r se would be ov er

t urn ed and chaos would r es ul t The D ivi ne
, .

P la n is perfect to the fin est detail— eve ry Pa r

ti le is n eeded is known is co un ted a n d used
o — — —

in the Pla n And G r avitatio n is the p l aine st

.

18 9
 DYN AMIC THOUGHT
evidence of the REALIT Y of The Infinite that
is a ffo r ded us In it we se e the actual m a
.

chin e ry of The I nf inite NO wonde r that great

.

think e r s hav e bowed thei r heads r ev e rently be

fo r e its Powe r and Awf ulness when thei r minds ,

have finally grasped its import V e rily the .

’
spa rr ow s fall is noted and kn own as the B ibli
, ,

ca l w riter has recorded for the fall is in ,

obedienc e to that gr eat Law that holds the Pa r

ticl e s in their places that makes possible the
—

whirl of worlds and the existence of Solar Sys

,

tems that indeed makes possible the Fo rm s

—
, ,

Of Life as we know them that Something that

—

forever and ever has and will silently cease

, , ,

l essly un tiringly and without emotion fulfille d

, , ,

it wo rk and destiny GRAVITATI O N

s — .

! i t t 1! ! ! ?

The Theo ry of D ynami c Thought also holds

that in addition to the existen ce of the Co smic
Min d or O cean of Mind p r inciple and the
,
— -

Lines Of Attraction that run th r o u gh it each ,

pa r ticle has its Mental Atmosphe r e or Aura ,

.

The Au ra is an Atmosphe r e of Min d that sur

r o unds the P article and al so the la r ger bodies
—

—a n d a l so living forms highe r i n the scale This .

Aur a is me re ly a n extensio n Of the bit O f Mind

that is segr egated or apparent separated from
the Cosmi c Min d for u se b y the individual Par
,

ticl e M ass or C r ea t ure

, ,
Thr o u gh a n d b y
.
,
 T HE R IDD L E OF THE

means of this Aur a the P article takes cogn iz

a n ce of the approa ch a n d natur e of the other
P articles in its vi c inity Th e same rule holds
.

good in the c ase of th e C r eatu res including ,

Man as we shall se e in a later chapt er The

,
.

‘
fact is mentioned here merely in order to c on
,

ne e t the several manifestation Of Me ntal Phe

n om e n a mentio n ed in the several pa r ts of this

book .

i I it it

Some may Object to the Theory of the Line s

“ ”
of Gravitatio n being the only carrie r s of the
E n ergy of the Sun as bein g contrary to the con
,

ce p tion Of Scie n ce that the Sun radiates Energy

in all dir e ctions e q ual ly just as does a piece of

,

hot i r o n or a lamp Answering this Objection

, .
,

the wri ter would say that there is a d e cided dif

ference i n the two cases The i ron or lamp .

radiates its heat and light to the particles Of the

su r rounding air and other Substance in c lose
“
distance the lines being very close together
, ,

—so c lose in fact that they seem to be c ont in

uou s and ha vin g n o space between them at l ea st ,

n o Spac e sufficientl y l a rge to be dete c ted b y the

eye of Man or his inst ruments But with the

, .

S un the cas e is difi e r e n t for the dista nc e s a re

,

greate r and the lines sp r ead apart as the dis

tanc e is in creased D raw a diagr am O f m any
.
'

fin e r ay s ema n atin g from a c e n t r a l po in t, and

'

191
 DYN A M I C THOUGHT

y ou will have the idea at once If Spa c e were .

filled with Substance just as is the Atmosphere

,

of the Earth — the Air is meant of course then

—
,

indeed would the lines practica lly be j oined to

g ethe r but as Space between the worlds is
,

almost devoid of Substance the lines b etween ,

the Sun and the other worlds and planets , ,

spread out rapidly as the distance from the Sun

increases .

To show how this Objection is really a n addi

tion al proof of the Theory the writer begs to call
yo u r attention to the fact that accordin g to the
calcul ations of the physicists in Science the ,
’
S un s energy would have been exhausted in 2 0 ,

years granting that it was dispers ed

,

equally in all directions durin g that time But .

,

n ote this Science in its other branches namely

, ,

in Geolo gy etc holds that the Sun already h as

, .
,

been throwin g out energy for or

more years and seems able to stand the strain
,

for many millions of years mo r e Thus Scien ce .

is arrayed a g ainst Science D oes not thi s .

Theory ha rmoniz e the two b y showing that the ,

S un do es n ot emanate Energy in all directio n s ,

e qually and at all times but on the contrary

,
—
,

radiates E n e rgy only along the lin es of G rav ita

tion, an d in p r op or tion to the r e lativ e dis tan ce s
an d s iz e s of the bodie s to whom such En e rgy is

r adiate d?

192
 THE RI D D LE OF THE S P HI NX
The w r iter need sca r cely state that in the
sho r t spa ce at his di spo sal in the pages Of thi s ,

book he has bee n able merely to outlin e hi s

,

Theo ry of Dynami c For c e as appli e d to the In ,

org anic World The patience of th e average

.

reader has limi ts and he must pas s on to other

—

features of the workings of the theory namely ,

the Mental Life of Man in which the same laws ,

are manifested But he feels that tho se inter

.
,

e ste d i n the phases Of the subje c t touch ed upo n ,

may explain for themselves the missing d etails

by reference to the teachin g s of Modern Science
on the subjects o f Physics r emembering , ,

alw ays to substitute the Theory of D ynamic

,
“ ”
Thought fo r the Ether theory that Modern
Science borrows from Aristotle as a tempo r a ry
”
makeshift The writer b elieves that this
.

Theory wil l account fo r many of the missin g

links in P hysics a broad statement he kn ows
—
, ,

and one either extremely impudent or superbly

confident acco r din g to the view poin t Of the
,
-

critic .

it if it fit fi= fl! i l l ?
1

The writer ma y be able to throw a little addi

tion al light proba b ly upon the qu estion of the
, ,

relatio n betwee n Gravitation an d the E xc it e ,

me n t waves Of Radiant Energy Without at

-
.

tempting to go into details he wishes to s u gg e st ,

that in v iew of the fact that the P arti cle s a r e

1 93
 DYN AMIC THOUGHT
“
connected by the Lines of Gravitation a ny ,

gr eat extended and rapid di st u rbanc e of a

, ,

number Of Particles would cause a series of nu

‘
dul atin g or wave like movements in the lin es
-
’
,
“
which mi ght be spoken Of as waves Of Agita
”
tion or Unrest in the Lines of Gravitation .

This A gitation or Unrest Of course would be

, , ,

tthu s communicated to all other Particles to

ward whom lines extended the intensity or ,

e ffect of such A g itation or Unrest depending

upo n the relative distances an d the number of ,

Particles involved We ma y easily imagine

.

h ow the intense and hi gh rate of vibration

among the Particles of the Sun manifesting as ,

intens e Heat would cause a like high degree Of

,

Agitatio n or Unrest among the Lines of Gravi

“ ”
tation the— lines dancing backwar d an d for
wa r ; around and about ; following the move
ments O f the Particles and thus producing ,
“ ”
waves of Gravitational Agitatio n and U n
r est which whe n communicated to the Particles
,

of the Earth would produce a similar Excite

,

ment among the Particles of the latter In the .

“
same wa y the Sun spots and conse quent
-

te r r e stial el e ctrical disturbance ma y be e x

plained .

While n ot absolutely tying himself to this

.

particular conception of the details of the work

ings Of the law the writer feels free to say that
,

194
 T HE RI DD L E O P THE S P HI NX
he conside r s it a ve ry reasonable ide a , and on e
that in all probab ility wi ll be fou n d to c ome
nea r er to explain ing the phe n ome n a tha n any ,

othe r hyp othesis It c e r tain ly coin c ides with

.

“ ”
the un dulatory wave the ory Of Scie nc e The .

idea is b u t cr u dely e xpressed here for lack of ,

space it b eing impossible to attempt to go into

,

details the mere mentio n of general principles

—

b ein g al l that is possibl e at this time and place .

i i' it n
a! it a! t
i it

A n d n ow for a few additional words on the

,

s ubject of our theory that in place of the h ypo

thetical Ethe r of Science a Substan c e that is
—

not S ub stance— there exists a great O c ea n of

Cosmic Mind The idea is not without corob
.

or ativ e p r oof i n the d i rection Of the tho u ght of

adva n ced thi nkers even among the r anks of
Science .

While Science has accustomed the public to

the idea that in th e Universa l Ethe r might be
found the ori gin of Matter the essence of
—

Energy the se c ret Of Motion it has n ot spoken

— ‘ —
“ ”
of Mind in c o nn e c t i o n wi th this Unive r sal
,

Somethin g B u t the id e a is n ot altogether new

.
,

and some da r in g Scie n tific thinkers hav e pla c ed

themselves on r ecord regarding same Let us .

q u ote from a few of them it will make smooth e r

—

our path .

Edward D rinke r Cop e in several of his wr it ,

1 95
 D Y N A M IC T H O U GHT
ings hin ted at the idea that the basis of Lif e an d
,

Consciousn e ss l ay back of the Atom s and m ig ht ,

be f oun d in the
Univ e rs al E the r

M M
.

“
D ol be ar says P ossibly the Ethe r m ay be
the m e dium thr oug h which in d an d atte r

M
”
r e ac t

M
.

He m s tre e t says !
in d in the Ethe r is no

m or e unn atu r al than fl ind in e sh an d

“
Stockw e ll says The Ether is coming to be
apprehended as an im m ate rial superphysical ,

substance fillin g all space car ryi n g in its in

, ,
~

finite throbbing bosom the specks of a ggregated

dyn amic force called worlds I t e m bodie s the .

‘
u l tim ate sp iritual p rin cip l e and represents the ,

u nity Of tho se fo r ces and ener gies from whi ch

spring as their source all phenomena physical
, , , ,

m e n tal and sp iritual as they are known to man

, .

D ol be ar speaks of the Ether as a substan c e ,

which besides the function of energy and m o

,
“
tion has other i nh erent properties
, ou t of

w hich cou ld e m e rg e , unde r p p

r o e r cir cum

s tan ce s, othe r p h e n om e n a, s uch as lif e , or m in d

’
or w hate v e r m ay be in the su bs tratum .

Ne wton spoke of it as a su btl e sp irit, or im

“

” “
m ate rial su bstan ce D olbe ar says Th e

M
.

Ethe r the p r ope r ties of which

— we v ain ly s triv e
to in te rp r e t in the te rm s of atte r the un dis ,

c ov e red properties O f which ought to wa rn eve ry

one again st th e dan g er Of st r o n gly ass e rting
196
 THE R IDD LE OF TH E S P HI NX
what is po ssible and what is impossible in the

M
”
natur e of things .

Stockw e l l sa y s That the Ether is not at

te r in any of its f orm s practically all scientists
,

are agreed D ol be ar again say s ! If the Ether

.
, ,

that fills all space is not atomi c in structure pre ,

sents n o friction to bodies moving through it

M
,

and is n ot subject to the law of gravitatio n it ,

d oe s n ot s e e m p r op e r to cal l it a tte r One .

might speak Of it as a substance if he wa n ts an

other name for it
s harp

te r,
As for myself I make a
.

dis tin ction be tw e e n the Ethe r

and feel somewhat con fused to hear one
,

an d M at

”
speak Of the Ether as Matter .

And yet in spite of the above expressions n o

, ,

Scientist has dared to say i n plain wo r ds that

,
,

M
the Ether or whatever took the pla c e of the
Ethe r m us t be ind although several seem to
,

be on the verge O f the declaration b ut ap ,

p ar e n tl y afraid to voice their thought .

t
i fi l l it N
’= ?
1 fl=

In view of what we have seen in our c o n sidera

tio n Of the facts and principles advanced in this
chapter we are invited to consider the follow
,

ing two S uplemental Propositions

M
S U PPLE E N T AL P R O P O S ITI ON III — Conn e c ting
e ach P ar ticl e of Subs tan ce with e ach and e v e ry

M
“ ”
othe r Par ticl e of Su bs tan ce the r e e x is ts lin es,
“ ”
of e n tal Conn e ction th e thickn e ss of which
,

1 97
 DYN A MI C TH O UGHT
dep e nds up on the dis tan ce be tw e e n the tw o p ar
ticle s, de cr e as ing in p r op or tion as th e dis tan ce
”
is in cr e as e d T he se lin es m ay be c on side r e d

M
.

“ ”
as con ditions o f the g r e at O ce an of Cosm ic
in d which p e rv ade s an d fills al l Sp ace , in clu d
ing the e ss e n ce or in n e r be ing of th e Par ticle s of
Su bstan ce , as w e ll as the sp ace be twe e n the s aid
“ ” “
P ar ticl e s T he s e
. lin e s ar e th e Lin e s of
G r av itation, by and ov e r w hich the p he n om e
n on of G r av itation is m an if e s te d T he s e Lin e s.

of G r av itation hav e always ex is te d be tw e e n e ach

Par ticl e Par ticl e , an d hav e p e r

an d e v e ry othe r

s is te d con tinu ous ly an d con s tan tly, thr oug hou t

all the chang e s of con dition , an d p osition, and

r e l ation , that the P ar ticle s hav e u n de rg on e .

” “ ”
The r e is no p ass ag e or tran sm iss ion of
En e rgy For ce
f G i i
’

or roav tat on ov e r th ese

lin e s, or any othe r chann e l, but, on the con tr ary

the En e rg y or For ce of G r av ita
s tan t an d c on tin u ou s M
M
tion is a c on
e n tal Conn e ction or B ond

e x is ting be tw e e n th e in d of the P ar ticl es,

r athe r than be twe e n the ir Su bs tan ce or

te rial
a M
M
.

S U PPLE E N TAL P R OP O SITI ON IV The Lin es of

— .

G r av itation , m e n tion e d in the p r e ce ding p r op o

sition, ar e the m e dium ov e r which trav e l, or ar e
“ ”
tran sm itte d the Thoug ht wav es r e su l ting

M
-

f r om the Ex cite m e n t o f the Par ticl e s, an d by

“ ”
w hich wav e s the e n tal State s ar e com

198
 T HE R IDD LE OF THE S P HI NX

m unicate d or tr ansm itte d

transm its or
tr action —
car rie s the
Cohe sion, Che m ical Affinity, e tc , e v i
’
M
. T he
e n tal
s am e

For ce
m e dium
f
o

.
At

de u cing in the r e lation of the Par ticl es to e ach

oth e r. T hus G rav itation n ot on ly p e rf orm s its
”
own work, bu t als o acts as a com m on car rie r
“ ”
for the w av e s of Ex cite m e n t, m anif esting as

R adian t En e rgy ; an d th e wav e s of D e sir e For ce , -

m anif e s ting as Attr ac tiv e En e rgy .

at k
5 "
3 l=
’ it

An d here the writer rests his c ase i n the

,

action in the Fo rum of Advanced Thought e n ,

“
tit l ed The The ory of Dyn am ic Thoug ht v s The .

’ ”
The ory of Ar is totl e s Ethe r
'

i n which he ap ,

pears for the Plainti ff He begs that you the .

,

memb ers of the ju ry will give to the eviden c e

, ,

and argument due consideration to the e n d that

, ,

y u ma y re n de r a j u st v er di c t
o .

199
 CHAPTER XIV

THE YS TERY O F M
M I ND

H E write r in this book has treated the two

, ,

manifestations of Life Mind and Sub

,

sta nc e as if they were separate thing s although

, ,

h e has hinted at his belief that Substance at the ,

l ast mi ght be found to emanate from Mind and

, ,

be but a cruder fo rm of its expression The .

better way to express the thought would be to

say that he believes that both Substance and ,

Mind as w e kn ow it are but expressions Of a

M
,

form of Mind as much hi gher than that w hich

w e kn ow as in d as the latter is hi gher than
,

Substance But he does not intend to follow

.

up thi s belief in this bo ok as the field Of the

, ,

work lies along other lines The idea is men.

tion e d here merely for the purpose of givin g a

,

clew to those who mi ght be inter ested in the

conclusions Of the writer re g ardin g this more
,

remote regions of the general subject .

The w r ite r agrees with the Ancien t O c cult

Teachings regarding the existen ce of The Cos
mi c Mind as he has stated in the last chapte r
,
.

2 00
 THE M Y STER Y OF MI ND .

This Cosmic Mind he believes is indepe n dent

M
, ,

of Substance in fact it is the Mother of Sub

M
,

stan c e and its twin brother ind as w e kn ow it

,
-

, .

in d as w e kn ow it and Substance are

, ,

alwa y s fo u nd in connectio n with other It is .

true that the form of Substa nce u sed b y Mind ,

as its body may be far finer than the rarest

,

vapor that we kn ow but it is Substan c e never

,

the l e ss. The working of the Great Plan of the

Universe seems to require that Mind shall
always have a body with whi ch to work and ,

this rule applies not only in the case of the

densest fo rm of Substance and the Mind pri n -

cip l e manifesting throu gh it but also in the cas e ,

of the highest manifestation of Mind as we ,

know it which requires a body through which

,

to manifest .

This constant combination of Mind and Sub

stan c e the fact that no Substance has b een
—

found without at least a trace of Mind an d no ,

Mind except i n relatio n to and c ombination with

Substance has led many scientific thinkers to
,

accept the Materialistic idea that Mind was but

a property of Substance or a quality thereof , .

O f course these philosophers a n d thinke r s have

,

had to admit that they could fo rm n o idea of the

r eal natu re of Min d and could n ot conceive how
,
“ ”
Sub stan c e r ea l ly could think b ut they fo und ,

th e M at e rial isti c idea a simple r one that its

2 01
 DYN AMIC THOUG HT
opposite and so they fell into it Notwithstand
, .

ing the fact that there was always a Something

“ ”
Withi n that would cry Pshaw ! at the co n
e l u sio n Of the ar gument or illustration these ,

me n hav e tho u ght it reasonable to believe tha t

there was n o such thing as Mind except as a ,
“
result of irritation of tiss u e etc But never , .
,

the l e ss there is always a Something in us that

, ,

i n spite O f ar gument keeps cryin g like a child

, ,
’ ”
tain t s o! And wonderful to relate we
, ,

h e ed the little voice .

This Materialistic theory is a curio u s r eve r sal

Of the facts of the case Even the very c onclu .

sions and reasonin g of these thinkers is made

pos sible o nly by the existenc e of that Mind

wh ich they would deny The hum an reason is .

“ ”
i n capable Of explaining the inner operatio n
Of the Mind upon a strictly and p ur ely physical
,

basis Tyndall the great English scientist

.
,
.

t ruthfully said the p assag e fr om the p hysics

,

of the brain to th e cor r e sp onding f acts of c on

,

is un thin kabl e
‘
s ciousn e ss, G r an te d that a
.

definite thoug ht and a definite m ol e cular action

of the br ain occur sim ul tan e ously, we do n ot p os

s ess the in te l l e ctual org an , n or app ar e n tly any

rudim e n t of the org an, which would e n able us to

p a ss by a p r oc e ss of r e as on ing f r om the one

”
p h e n om e n on to t he othe r .

Th e Mate ri alist is prone to an attempt to r out

2 02
 THE M Y STER Y OF MI ND .

“ ”
th e advo c ates of Min d with a dema nd for an
“ ”
answe r to the qu estion What is Mind ? , The
best answe r to that questio n lies along the p r o
’
v e rbial Irishma n s li ne s of a n sweri n g a q ues

tion by aski n g anothe r on e resultin g in the

‘answe ring que stio n , ” “
What is atte r ?
a fact the huma n re aso n is un a bl e to give a n
,
”
,

As M
intelligent answe r to either questio n and th e ,

best opinion seems to b e to cons i der them as

bu t two aspects of Something the r eal origi n ,

of which lies i n Something Highe r of whi c h ,

b oth a r e aspects or forms of e xpression .

The O ccult Teachin g with which the wr ite r

,
“ ”
agrees is that the
,
Mind inherent in any p or
tio n of substanc e fr om the Corpuscle u p to the
,

B r ai n of Man is but a seg r egated ( or ap

,

p a r e n tl y sepa r at e d ) portion o f the Unive r sal

Mind principle or Cosmi c M in d This frag
-

, .

ment of Mind is alway s co nn e c ted with Sub

stance and in fact it is b el i ev e d that it is se p
, , ,

ar ate d from the Universa l Mi n d a n d the other ,

“ ”
Separate Minds b y a film of the ra r est S ub
stance so fine as to be sca rcely disti nguishable
,

fr om M in d This sepa r ation is n ot a to tal se p

.

aratio n howeve r fo r the fragme n t Of Mi nd is

, ,

in co nn ectio n with all other fragm e n t s Of Mind ,

“ ”
b y mental fllam e nts and besides is n ev er out
,

of touch with the Cosmic Mind .

2 03
 DYN A MI C TH O UGHT
But comparatively the fra gment of Mind is
, ,

ap ar t from the rest and we m u st consider it in

,

this way at least for the purpose of study con

, ,

sideration and illustration It is like a drop i n

,
.

the O cea n of Mind although c onnected i n a, ,

way with every other drop and the O cea n itself

, , .

The individual Mind is not closely confin ed

within the Substance i n which it abides but ex ,

tends beyond the physical limits of the Sub

stance sometimes to a quite considerable dis
,

tance The Aura or egg shaped projection or

.
,
-

emanatio n of Mind surroundin g each Particle

,

and ea ch Individual is an instan ce O f this In

, .

addition to the Aura there is possibly an exte n ,

sion Of Mind to a considerable distance beyond

the immediate vicinity O f the physical limits the ,

c onnection however never bein g broken during

, ,
“ ”
the life term .

Mental i nfl uen ce at a distance however does , ,

n ot always require the above mentioned p r oj e c

tio n of the Mind Thou ght waves often answer
.
-

the purpo se a n d besides there is such a thing

, , ,

as the imparting of Mental vibrations to the

small particl e s of Substan c es with which the
a tmosphere i s fil led which vi b rations continue
,

fo r qu ite a t im e Oft en for a long pe r iod afte r

,

the p r esence of the i ndividual produ cing them .

Thes e matters shall be di scuss e d in l ate r chap

ters of this book .

2 04
 THE M Y STER Y OF MI ND .

The M in d O f Man is a fa r mo re c omple x

thi ng that is ge n erally ima g ined b y the ave r ag e
man Not only i n its varied manifestation of
.

“
consciousness but its great re g io n of below
,
”
consciousness or Infra Consciousnes s as it is ,

called It shall be the p u rpose of the seque l to

.

this book ( now i n preparation ) which will be

“ ”
entitled The Wonders of the M i nd to de
,

scribe th e se inner workings and to po in t out

,

methods of utilizing the same .

O ur next chap ter entitled The Finer Forc e s

,
“

”
of th e M ind , will l ead us into thi s field .

2 05
 CHAPTER XV .

TH E F I NE R F ORCE S OF TH E M I ND .

‘ ’
1 was the w rit er s o rigi n al i n t en tio n to close
the book wi th the chapter i n which he
brought to a close his argum ent and presen ,
“ ”
tation of the case of D yn ami c Tho u ght The .

book was written for the purpose of demo n

str atin g that Theory and it naturally sho uld
,

have clo sed there The w r iter has i n simul

M
.

tan e ou s course of preparation a companion

book entitled The Won de rs of T h e in d in
,
“ ”
,

whi ch in addition to information and instru o

,

tio n r egardin g the latent powers an d hidden

regions Of the mind includin g a n investi g atio n
—

Of the Infra conscious and Ultra conscio u s

- -

Re gions ; Automatic Thinkin g ; O ccult Systems

Of Men tation ; Mental D evelopment and Un ,

foldm e nt etc — h e purposes takin g u p the s ub

.
,
“ ”
j e ct Of Dynam i c Thought from the
,
Me n tal
Pla n e Of Ma n An d h e tho u ght it bette r to keep
.

the two b r a n ch e s of th e sub je c t separate and

apart .

But notwithstan ding the above facts he fe el s

, ,

that h e c a nn ot cl ose the p r ese n t b oo k th e con

—

2 06
 TH E FI N ER FOR CES OF TH E MI ND
sideration of the p r esent phase Of the subject ,

witho u t at least a passin g reference to the fact

“ ”
that Dynamic Thought is fully operative on
the P lane of H uma n Mentatio n as on the Plane ,

of Atomi c Mentation In fa c t Ma n has the

.
,

same power potentially that is possessed by

, ,

the Atom only r efin ed to a deg r ee correspond

,

ing to the development O f Man as c ompared to

that of the Atom The Power is raised to a
.

higher Plane of Mentation but is fully opera ,

tive.

J u st as the body of Man c ontains physical life

c orrespondin g with the di fferent sta g es Of lower
physical life mineral ve g etable and animal
, , ,

fo r instance the mineral like bones a n d the

,
-

mineral salts in the system ; the plant lik e life -

a n d wo rk of the cells ; and the animal like flesh -

a n d physica l life ; in addition to the wonderful

brain structure and fine brain developm e n t
-

peculiar to Man so has Ma n the lowe r Mental

—

! u a l ities of the lower life in addition to his

,

glorious Human Consciousness that is reser ed v

for the Hi ghest Form of Life on the g lobe .

In hi s Mental r egions man has the power of

,

the Atom of attracting particles O f Substan c e to

him that he ma y combine it with other Sub
,

stances i n building up his body then he has the

—

plant like cell mentation that does the building

-

up work and repairs wo un ds and damaged

, ,

2 07
 DYN AMIC THOUGHT
parts , then he has the animal mentatio n
e tc —

evidencing in the passions desires and emo , ,

tions of the purely animal nature and which ,

mentation by the way keeps Man b u s y i n co n

, ,

trolling b y means Of hi s hi gher mental faculties ,

’
that are Go d s gift to Man and are not p os

M
,

sessed by the animals But all this will fo rm .

part of the se quel The Wonde r s of The ind

“
,
”
,

and are merely mentioned here in passin g .

And just as Man is enabled to use elementary

,

the physical qualities that he finds in his body ,

and to turn same to go od account in living his
human life so does man consciousl y or uncon
, , ,

sciou sl y m ake u se of these eleme n tary Menta l

,

powers in his everyday mental life An d if he .

but r ealizes what a cons cious use of these facul

ties gu ided b y the Huma n Will will do Ma n
, , ,

may become a difi e r e n t order of being Thi s .

is the basis of the O ccult Teaching s and the ,

Mysteries of the Ancients as well as the teach ,

ing s of the modern sec r et esoteric bodies and

‘ ”
societies su ch as the Rosicrucians and Her “
,
”
metic Brotherho od and several o ther societies
,

whos e names are not known the r e al societies

—

are r efe r red to n ot the brazen i mi tations that

,

unscrupulous men are holdin g o u t to the public

as the ori ginal o r de r s membership b eing O ffered
,

and u rged fo r the consideration o f a few dol

l a r s It is n ee dl es s to say that m e mb ership in
.

2 08
 TH E FI N ER FORCES OF THE MI ND
the r e al O cc ult o r ders is n e v e r urg e d and cannot ,

be boug ht .

But to return to the subject the Individual —

Min d of Man is in di rect touch n ot only with ,

the g r eat Cosmic Mind but also with the Indi,

vidu a l Min d Of every other Man J ust as the .

Particles are bo un d by lines O f Attraction so ,

are the Minds of Men bound together b y lines

of Mi n d or Mental filaments
, And just as Sp e .

c ial forms Of Attraction exist between the Par

t icl e s so do S pecial forms of Attraction exist

,

betwee n Me n And j u st as Particles are in

.

flue nce d at a di fference by other Particles SO ,

are Men influ enced at a dist an ce b y other Men .

A n d just as the P a r ticle draws toward itself that

which it D esires SO do Men d r aw towa r d them
,

s elves that which they D e sire And just as .

“ ”
Menta l States and Excitement are tra n smit

M
-

ted or comm unicated f r om P article to Particle

, ,
“
so ar e n e tal States or Excitement tra n s
“
m itte d or comm unicated from Men to Men As .

”
Abov e s o B e l ow— as B e low s o Abov e say s th e ,

Old O c cult Max im and it may be fo un d to op er

,

ate o n eve ry pla n e .

The phen omen a of Thought Tra n sfe r e n c e ;

Te l epathy ; Telesthesia ; M ental P r ojectio n ;
Suggestio n ; Hypnotism Mesmerism etc et c , , .
, .
,

may be explain ed and understood b y re aso n of ,

“
a n a cqu ain tanc e wi th the Theo ry of Dynami c
2 09 .
 DYN A M
IC T H O U GHT
Tho ught , as explained in this book An un .

de rstan ding Of on e gives y ou the key to the other

— fo r the Law operates pre c isel y the same on

e ach partic u lar plane If the r eade r wil l thi nk

.

over this statement and then appl y it to h is in

,

v e stigation s and experiments he wi ll fin d that ,

he has the key to many mysteries the loose end

—

Of a mighty ball of thread which he may un win d ,

‘
at his leisure .

Let u s be g in by a conside r ation Of the process

of Tho ught production in the Human Mind
-
In .

this wa y we may arrive at a clearer i dea Of the

M
Mental P he n omena kn own as Thou ght Fo r ce ;
ental P ower ; Tho ught waves ; Thought vibra
tions ; Mind t r ansference ; Me ntal I nfluence et c
-
-
-

, .

To u nderstand these things we must begi n b y

unde r standin g the Pro c ess Of Thought produc -

tion Here is fo un d the Secret of the phe

.

n om en a named and much more ,

.

In the first place while the Brain is the O rgan

,

of the Mind — the Instrument that the Mind uses

I n p r oducing Thought still the Brain does n ot ,

do the th inking nor is the b ra in matter vi sible

,
-

to the ey e the mate r ial instrument of thinking

,
.

The B rai n ( and other portio n s of the n e rv ous

“ ”
systems in cluding the little b rains or gan
,

glia,fo und i n various parts of the b ody ) is com

—
p os ed of a certain substance a fine fo rm of
Pla sm which howev e r is bu t the g r o un d wo rk
,
-

2 10
 T H E F I N E R FORCES OF THE MI ND
of fo un dation fo r fin er forms of Substa nc e u sed
in the p r odu ction Of Thought Science has n ot .

discovered this fin e r Substa n ce fo r it is n ot ,

v isible to the e y e or to the fin est inst ruments

, ,

but t r ained Occulists know that it e xists This .

fin e Substance escapes the scalpe l and m iscr os

cope O f the biolo g ists and anatomists and con , ,
“ ”
sequentl y their search for Mind in the Brain
,
“
is futile There is something more than tis
.

”
sue to be irritated in the Brain B ut remem .
,
“
ber that this something mo r e is still Sub
,

stanc e and n ot Mind itself

, .

“ ”
Thought is a fo rm of Excitement in this
fine brain s u bstance which we may as well call
-

Psycho plasm from the two G r eek words mean

-

,
“ ” “ ”
ing the mind and a mold or matrix r e
, , ,

sp e ctiv e l y— th e c omb ined word mean ing the

“ ”
mould or matrix of Mind in other wo r ds the ,

material Sub stance u sed b y the Mind i n whi ch to

“ ” “ ”
cast or mold Thoughts .

This Excitem e nt in the Psychoplasm mani

fests in vibrations Of its particles for like all
—
,
“ ”
Substan ce it has particles
, Al l scientists .

agree that in the p r ocess of thi nkin g there is a n

“ ”
e xpe n diture of Ene r gy and a usi n g up O f ,
-

material Substa nce Ju st h ow this is e ffected

.
,

the y do n ot know b ut their expe r imen ts have

,

shown that there is Energy manifest e d a n d

u s e d a n d also Substanc e co n s um ed
, .

2 11
 DYN AMIC THO U GHT
The secret of the production O f Tho ught does
n ot lie i n the B rain o r nervous s y stem whi ch ,

are but the material s ubst r atu m upo n which the

Mi n d works and which it uses as a mold or
,

mat r ix for the production of Thought Tho ught .

is the p r oduct of Mind d i r ecting Fo r ce u po n

Substance in the shape of Ps ychoplasm An d .

Energy is manifested in the produ ctio n of

Tho u ght just as mu ch as in the operatio n of the
Law of Attraction or Chemical Action

M
, .

What Force and Energy ? may b e ask ed

”
.

“ ”
The answe r is e n tal Force 1 But altho ugh
the answer stares them r ight in the face scie n ,

tists de ny that Mind contai n s Fo r ce or Energy

within itself and persist in thinking of Force
,
“ ”
as a mechanical thin g or as necessa rily de
,

rived from the common forms of Ener gy such ,

as Heat Light or Electricity

,
They ignore the
.

fact that Mind has a Finer Force which it uses

to perform its work .

How do the Atoms attract each other and

move together ? There is an evidence of Force
a n d Energy he re that is not Heat Light or Elec ,

tr icity what is i t ? Whe n a ma n wi shes to

—

cl ose his hand he Wills that it be clo sed a n d

, ,

send s a cur ren t of thi s Finer Force of the Min d

alo ng th e n e rve to the muscle and the latter
,

c o n t rac t s and the h and is cl osed A simil a r .

2 12
 T H E FI N ER FORC E S OF THE MI ND
p r o c ess i s u sed in e ve ry mu s cula r a c tio n What .

is the For ce us e d?
S ci e nce admits the existen ce Of this Fo r c e ,
“ ” “
and calls it N ervo u s En e rgy or , N e rv e
” “
Force . It holds that it must be somethi n g
like Electricity and some even go SO far as to
,

say that it is Electricity They base their ideas

.

upon the fact that whe n Electricity is applied

to the muscle of living or dead animals they ,
“
contract just as they do when thi s N e rve
”
Force is applied and every movement of the
,

muscles may be s o produced by Ele c tricity ,

which becomes a counterfeit N erve Force .

But here is the point thi s Force cannot be

, ,

identical with Electricity for n on e of the ap

,

p li an c e s for r e g is te r in g e l e c tr ic cu rr e n ts w il l
r e gis te r it .

Fin e r Force of the M

It is not Electricity bu t is s om e
in d generated in the
material substratum that the Mind uses as a
,
,

base of operation .

This Fi n e Force of the Mind is gene r ated i n

some wa y i n the Brain and N ervous System ,

b y actio n upon the Psychoplasm The Brain .

,

or brains ( fo r Man has several centres worthy

of that term ) are like great d ynamos and store

ho u ses of thi s Fo rc e a n d the n e r ves a r e the

,

wires that car ry it to all parts of the s y stem .

Mo r e tha n this , the ne rv es have been fo un d

to be ge n erators of Force also as well as th e, ,

2 13
 DYN AMIC THO UG HT
B rain Experiments have shown that the s up
.

ply Of Force in a ne rv e vanishes when the nerve

is used in which case it draws upon the store
,

ho u ses for an additional s upply .

T his Fine Force of the Mind is really the

so urc e of All Energy for as we have shown in ,

previous chapters all Motion arises from Men ,

tal Action and t hi s form O f Force or Energy

,

i s the primal Force or Energy produced by the

Mind And this Force is in Operation in all
.

fo rms of Life from the Atom to the Man And

, .

not onl y may it be used by the Particle but ,

Man also has it at hi s disposal

, ,
.

As a p r oof that Substance is used up and -

Energy manifested in the production Of

Thought Science points to the fact that the
,

temperature of a nerve rises when it is used ,

and the temperature of the Brain increases

when it i s u sed for extended Thought Sci .

entists hav e claimed and advanced a mass of ,

proof to back up the same that Thought was ,

as much a form O f Ener gy as was the pulling

of a t r ain of cars and was attended by th e pro
,

duction of a de finite amount of Heat resulting ,

from the activity of the fine substance of the

physical e x tended resista n t and composite sub
stratum .

But Science has taken all this to mean that

,

Thought and Mind were purely material things ,

2 14
 THE FI N ER FORC E S OF THE MI ND
a nd p r operties of M atte r It has cl aime d that .

“
M atte r Thinks inst e a d Of that M in d us e s
”
,

th e M atte r or S ubsta nc e in its fin er fo rms , as

,

a substratum for the p roduction of Thought .

B uc hn e r th e l eade r of th e p urel y Mat e rialisti c

,

schoo l , claim s positivel y that Tho ught is b u t

“
the product of Matte r H e sa y s ! I s it n ot

M
.

a patent fact Obvio u s to all but the wilfully

,

b lind that m atte r doe s think? D e la e ttrie

made mer ry over the narro wness of the mental

‘
ists i n sayin g ! Whe n people ask whethe r mat
,

ter c a n think it is as though they asked

,

whether matter can strike the hours Matter ,

indeed as such thinks as little as it strikes the

, ,

ho u rs ; but it does both whe n b r ought in to s u ch

,

conditions that thinking or hou r st ri king r e ,

-

”
sul ts as a natura l action or pe r fo rma nc e .

The above quoted opinion of Buchn e r S hows

h ow narrow and on e sided a talented ma n may
-

become b y r easo n of shutting out all other

poi n ts of view and seeing only one phase of
,
“ ’
a subject The ex ample of the hou r st riki n g is
.
-

a poor figu r e for the Materia l ists fo r although ,

matte r doe s st rike the hou r s it does so onl y ,

when wo un d u p b y Ma n un der di r ection Of his

Mi n d An d in the ma n ufactu r e adjustment
.
, ,

and win ding Of the c lock, M ind is the Cause Of

the Action An d mo re than this the ve ry
.
, ,

a c tio n of the c oiled sp rin g that is th e i m m ediat e

2 15
 DYN AMIC THOUGHT
ca u se Of the striking results f r o m the m ental
,

e ffort Of the Particles of the sprin g endeavo r

ing to r esume their accustomed position un der ,

the law of Elasticity as explained in our chap

,

ters on Substance .

Science renders valuable se rvi c e in showm g

“ ”
us the details of the mechanism of Thought ,

but it Will never really e x p lain anything unless

it assumes the existence Of Mind back Of a n d ,

in everythin g It may dissect the brain cells

.
-

and show u S thei r composition but it n eve r ,

will find Mind unde r the scalpel or in the scale ,

or test tube N ot only is this tru e but it ca n

-
.
,

n ot even discove r the fine Psychoplasm which

is u sed in the p r oductio n Of Min d B u t we .

may make use Of its investigations r egarding

the matter of Activity Of Brain substance in -

the p r oces s of Tho ught and by combining them

,

with our belief re g ardin g the existence of M ind

we may fo rm a complete chain of reasoning ,

without any missing link s these missing link s

— - -

“ ”
appearin g both in the case of the no mind -

“
philosophers and the no matte r m e tap hy
,
-

Sician s
.

T hi s theo ry of Mind and Substance c on sid

e r ed as the two aspects of Something Higher ,

from which both have originated o r emanated ,

“
will c ome to be regarded as the only think
”
abl e p r oposition in the e nd And wi th thi s
, .
,

2 16
 THE FI N ER FORCE S OF THE MI ND
idea i n view we ma y use the facts and e x p e ri
,

men ts of t he Materialists while smiling at their ,

theo ries And with but a slight change of

.
,

words we ma y turn against them their own

M
,

ve rba l batteries In this way w e may tak e

M
.
,
’ “
ol e sch ott s famous statement Thought is
”
but a m otion of atte r a n d r ender it in

M M
,

te lligibl e by making it read a s follows

“
Though t p r oduce s otion in atte r .

T his Fine r Force of

the Mind is in full evi
denc e to those who look for it and although it ,

may n ot be registered by the scales or in str u

ments designed to register the coarser grades
of Force still it is re gistered in the minds of
,

me n a n d women and in the actions resultin g

,

from thei r thoughts These living registers of

.

th e Fo rce respond readily to it — and every ,

one of us is such a register Just as is the .

Forc e a much higher grade of Energy than the

fo rms u s u ally considered as comprising the e u
ti r e r ange O f Energy so are the inst ruments
,

r equi r ed fo r its regist r ation m uch higher than

those used to determine the degrees of Heat ,

Light Electri c ity and Magnetism It may be

, , .

that the futu r e will give u S instr uments adapted

for the p urpose— in fact it begins to look even
now as if the same we r e forthc omin g B ut .

whether we have such mechanical instrumen ts ,

or n ot the living instruments give us a s uff

, i
2 17
 DYN AMIC THO U GHT
ci en t proof Of the existen ce of th e Fo rc e a n d
,

its ope r atio n.

Well the w rite r still fin ds himse lf unable to

—

b rin g the book to a close He added this chap

.

ter to S how that the property of D yn amic

,

Thought extended to the highest development

of Mind as well as abiding in the lowest
, . An d ,

now that he has ventured upon the subject he ,

fin ds himself impelled to give y ou a few in

stances of the workin g s and operations of that
Law in the case of Human Mental Life An d
,
.

thi s mea n s on e mo r e chapte r b ut onl y one re

—
,

memb e r The book must c ome to a n end some

.

time r emembe r An d so we will pass over into

.
,

anothe r chapte r which will b e en titled

, ,
“ ”
Tho ught in Ac tio n .

2 18
 C H AP TE R XVI

T H O UGHT I N A CTI O N

W I THOUT
attemptin g to go in to d e t ai ls or
to ente r into explanations , the writer
,

pu rposes taking his readers on a flying trip

“
thro ugh the regio n Of Tho ught in A c tion or ,
“
Dyn ami c Thought i n O peration in H uman
”
Life . The detail s of this fascin ating regio n
m u st b e l eft for a n othe r a n d more extended
visit in our next book ( before me n tioned )

M
,

which will be called The Wonde rs of The

“

”
in d B ut he thi nks that ev e n this flyi ng t rip
.

will prove of interest a n d in structio n .

Let us sta rt with a hasty look at Ma n him

self Not to speak of his Seve n P l anes Of
.
“

”
Min d which belongs to the next visit we fin d
, ,

him a ve ry i n teresting Obj ect N ot only has he

.

a phy si c al bod y apparent to our senses b ut he

, ,
‘ ”
has also a fine r or astral body whi c h he may ,

u se ( un cons c io u sly or conscio u sl y when he

, ,

l ea rn s how ) for little e xc u rsions away from the

body during his lifetime This Ast r al B odv is
, .

c omposed Of Substance just as his de n s er

2 19
 DYN AMIC THO U GHT
physi c a l body The field and range Of Sub
.

stance extends far beyond the powers Of ordi

nar y vision as even the Materialists must ad
,
“
mit when they talk of Radi ant Matter ,
“ ”
Ethe rial S ubstance etc Then he has cur
, .

ren ts of Fine Force coursing thro ugh his n e rv

ous s y stem which may be seen by those pos
,
“ ”
sessing Astral Vision if the teaching s Of the ,

O ccul tists be t r ue .

“
Then he like the Particle has an Aura or
, ,

egg shaped p r ojection of Mind and fine par

-

ticl e s of Psychoplasm which has been thrown ,

O ff in the process O f Thou ght and which clus ,

“
ters around him producin g a Mental Atmo
,
”
sphere which constantl y surrounds hi m and
, ,
“ ”
makes itself felt by those comin g in his pres
ence Those who r ead these words may r e
.

“ ”
member readily the feelin g they have e x
, ,

p e r ie n ce d when com i n g in contact with certain

people how s ome radiated an atmosphere of
—

cheerfulness brightness etc ,

while othe r s ,
.
,

radiated the very opposite Some radiate a .

feelin g Of energy activity etc while others , , .

,

manifest just the reverse Many likes and dis .

likes between people meetin g for the first time ,

arise in thi s way each finding in the mental ,

atmosphere of the other some inharmonious ,

element These radiations a r e pe rceiv ed b y

.

othe r s coming i n to their range .

220
 THOUGHT I N ACTIO N
O c cultists t ell us that the character of a
’
man s tho ught vibrations ma y be determin ed
b y cer tai n colo r s whi ch are visible to those
,
“ ”
havi n g Ast r al Sight The re is nothin g so
.

wonderful abo ut thi s when it is r emembered

,
”
t hat the va r ious colors Of light comprising ,

the visible colors of the spectrum ranging from ,

red o n th r ough orange yellow green blue in

, , , , ,

digo and terminating in violet arise simply

, ,

f r om di fferent rates of vibration Of the Par

ticl e s of Substance An d as Thought is pro
.

duce d by Mind causin g vibrations in the P sy

chop l asm why is not the Astral Colors reason
,

able ? We cannot stop to consider these colors

in detail but ma y run ove r the ones correspond
,

ing to each marked Emotion of Thought as re ,

po r ted b y the O ccult teachi n g s .

For instance the shade of the thou ght mani

festing i n physical or organic functions is Of ,
“ ”
a colorles s white or color of clear water ;
,

and the color of the thought manifesting in

Fin e Force or Vital Energy is that of air , ,

heated air arising f r om a furnace or heated

ground when it emerges from the body
—

although Of a faint pink whe n in the body

itse l f .Black represents Hate Malice etc ; , ,
.

Gray ( bri ght shade ) represents Se lfishne ss ,

while Gra y of a dark dull shade r ep r esents

Fea r .G r een represen ts Jealo u s y De ceit , ,

221
 DYN A M I C T H O U GHT
T r eachery and S imilar emotions rangin g from
, ,

the dull shades which characterize the lower

and c ru de r forms to the bri ght shades whi ch ,

cha r acte riz e the fin e r or more del icate forms ,

“ ” “ ” “
of Tact Politen ess
,
D iplomacy etc , ,
.

Red ( dull shade ) represents Sens uali ty and

Animal Passion while r ed ( bright and vivid )
,

represents Anger Crimson in varyin g shades ; .

,
“ ”
r ep r esents the phases Of Love Brown rep .

r esents Avarice or G r eed O r ange represents .

P ride and Ambition ; a n d Y ellow in va ryin g ,

Shades represents grades of Intellectual Powe r

, .

Blue is the color of the Religious thoughts ,

ranging however through a great va riety of

, ,

stages f r om the dull shade of superstitious r e

,

l igiou s bel ief to the beautiful violet of the

,

highest reli gious emotion or thought What is .

“ ”
gen e rally kn own as Spirituality is charac
te riz e d by a Light Blue of a pec ul iarly luminous
Shade Just as there are ultra red and ult r a
.
-

vio le t r ays in the spectrum which the ey e can ,

n ot perceive SO O ccultists inform us there are

,
“ ”
c o l o r s in the Aura or Mental Atmosphere of
a p e r son of un usual ps ychic or occult develop
men t the ul tra violet r ay s indicatin g the
,
-

thought Of on e who is p ur suing the highe r

'

plan es of oc c ult thought and unfoldmen t, whi l e

the ult r a r ed is evidenced by those p ossessin g
-

o ccul t devel opmen t but who a r e usin g the same ,

222
 THO UG HT I N ACTI ON
“
for base and selfish pu rposes bla ck magic — -

in fa c t The r e are other shades kn own to Cc

.
,

c ul tists i n dicating several hi ghl y deve l op e d

,

states of Min d , b ut it is n ee dl es s to men tion

them he r e .

B ut the influenc e of these Pa rticle s of

”
Thought stu ff th r own O ff from the Min d
-

Psychoplasm un der the vibrations produced b y

the Mind duri n g the process Of Thought does ,

n ot cease with the phenomena sur r o un ding the

Au ra The y are r adiated to a c o n siderable dis

.

tance and p r oduc e a n umbe r of e fl e cts We

'

, .

wi ll r emembe r how th e Co rpuscles or Electrons

a r e thrown O R b y Substance i n a hi gh state Of
vib r ation Well the same law manifests in the
.
,

v ib r atio n s atte n da n t upon the p r oduction Of

Thought The pa r ticles are th r own O ff in g r eat

.

qu antities each vibrating at the rate imparted

to it du ring the proces s NO these particles Of
‘
.

“
Tho ught stu ff do not compose the Thought
-

”—
waves the latter belo n g to a difi e re nt set of
phenomena .

“
These particles of vib r ating Tho ught
”
st u ff fly O ff f r om the brain of the thinker in ,

all di rections and a ffect other persons who

,

may come in c ontact with them T here is an .

important rule here howeve r and that is that , ,

the y seem to be att r acted b y those mi n ds which

a r e vib r ati n g in si mila r tho ught r at e s with -

2 23
 DYN AMIC THOUGHT
themselves a n d a r e but feebly attracted an d
,
—

in some cas e s actually repelled by minds

,
—

“
vibrating on Opposite lines of Thought Like .

attracts Like in the Thought World and

, ,
“ ”
Birds of a feathe r flock together he r e as ,

elsewhe r e .

“
Some of these particles of Thought stufi -

are stil l i n e xistence and vibratin g which pro, ,

ce e de d from the minds of persons long since

dead the same being emitted or thrown O ff

,

during the lifetime of the persons however , .

Just as a distant star which was destro y ed ,

hundreds of y ears ago may have emitted rays ,

which a r e o nly now reaching our vision years ,

after the destruction of the star whi ch emitted

them— and just as a n Odo r will remain in a
room after the object causing it has departed
the particles still remaining and vibrating
and just as a stove removed from a room ma y
leave heat vibrations behind it SO do these
—

particles persist vib r ate and infl uence othe r

, ,

minds l ong afte r the person who caused them

,

may hav e passed out of the body In thi s way .

,

r ooms houses n eighborhoods and l o c alities

, , ,

may vibrate with the thoughts of people who

l ived the re l o n g ago b u t who have s inc e passed
,

away or removed
,
These vib r atio n s a ffect
.

people l iving i n these places to a greate r or ,

le sse r ext en t , d e p en din g upon circum sta nc e s,

2 24
 T HOUGHT I N ACTI O N
but the y ma y alway s be c o un ter ac ted or
changed ( if they are of undesirable nature )
b y setting upon positive vibrations on a di ffer
ent plane of mind or character Of thought
,
.

The mi nd Of a thi nke r is constantly emittin g

“
or throwin g O ff these particles of Thought
”
st uff ; the distance and rate of speed to an d ,

by whi ch they travel being determined by the

,
“ ”
force u sed in thei r production there being ,

a great di fference between the thought of a vi g

or ou s thinker and that emanating from a weak
, ,

listless mind These projections of Thought

.

stu ff have a tendency to min gle with others of

a c orresponding rate of vibration ( depending
upon the characte r Of the thought ) Some r e .

mai n around the places where they we r e emit

ted while others float ofi like clouds and Obe y
, ,

the Law of Attractio n whi ch draws them to per

sons thinking along similar lines .

The characte risti c s of c ities arise in this way ,

the general avera g e of Thought of thei r in

habitants causing a corresponding Thought
atmosphere to hang over and around it which ,

atmosphere is distinctly felt by visitors and ,

Often dete rmines the mental character of the

persons residing there in spite of their pre
,

v iou s characteristics — that is un l e ss th e n u

, y
de rs tan d the Laws of Th oug ht Some nei gh
.

borhoods also ha v e th eir own peculia r Mental

, ,

225
 DYN AMIC THOUGHT
Atmosphere as all may have noticed if they
,
“ ”
have visited certain tough nei ghborhoods ,

on the one hand and nei ghborhoods of an op

,

p o site kind on the other Certain kinds of

, .

Thoughts and Actions seem to be conta gious

in certain places an d th e y ar e to those who
—

do not understand the Law Certain S hops .

seem to have thei r own atmosphere some r e—

fl e ctin g confidence and honest dealin g and ,

others radiating an atmosphere that causes

patrons to hold ti ghtly to their pocketbooks ,

and in some extreme cases to be certain that

, ,

their buttons are ti ghtly sewed on their g ar

ments Y es places like people have their dis
.
, ,

tin ctiv e Mental Atmospheres and both arise ,

from the same cause .

And each person draws to himself these par

“ ”
ticl e s of vibratin g Thought stu ff corre -

sp on din g with the g eneral mental attitude

maintained by him If one harbors feelin g s of
.

Malice h e will find thoughts of malice r e

, ,

ven g e hate etc pourin g in upon him He has

, ,
.
,
.

made himself a centre Of Attraction and h as ,

set the Law into operation His only safe .

course is to r esolutely chan g e hi s thought V ibra

tions .

A most r emarkable form of these particles

O f Thought stu ff is evidenced in the case O f
—

“
what are known among occultists as Thou ght
226
 TH OUG H T I N ACTIO N
”
fo rms , whi ch are aggregations of Particl e s Of
Thought stuff energized by intense and positive
-

thought and whi ch a r e sent out with such in

,

ten sity and positivenes s that they are almost ,

“ ”
vitalized and manifest almost the same de
,

gree of mental influence that would be mani

fe ste d by the sender if he were present where
they are This highl y interesting phase Of the
.

subject would take many chapters to desc ribe

in detail and we must content ou r selves with
,

a mere passing view T o those who are inter.

e ste d in the subject the writer would say that

,

he purposes considering them at considerable

M
len gth in the forthcomin g book Th e Won de rs
“
,

of Th e in d which has been alluded to else

,

where .

Besides the operation of these particles of

Thought stu ff emitted during the production of
-

Thought there are many other phases Of

,

Thou ght Influence or Thought i n Action The

, .

principal phase of this phenomena arises from

the wo rkin g of the Law of Attraction between
the r espective minds of di fferent people Just .

as are the P articles of Substan c e united and

“ ”
connected by lines of connection so are the ,

minds of Men connected And the st r ong .

“ ”
pul l of D esire manifests alon g these lines ,

just as it does in the case of the Atoms Ther e .

has b ee n much writte n of r ecent y ears r egarding

227
 DYN AMIC TH O UGH T
“
th is D rawing Power of the Mind and al ,
”

though some of what has been written is the

veriest rubbish and nonsense yet under it all ,

there remains a stron g form substantial sub

, ,

strat um O f Fact and Truth Men do attract .

Success and Failure to them people do attract

—

things to them as strange as it may s eem to

—

the person who has not acquainted himself with

the laws underlyin g the phenomenon .

“ ”
There is no miracle about all of this it is—

simply that the Law of Attraction is i n full

operation and that people of similar thoughts
,

are drawn to g ether by reason thereof The .

workings of this Law are somewhat intricate ,

but all of us are constantly using them con ,

sciou sl y or u nconsciously We draw to our

.

selves that which we D esire very much or that ,

which we Fear very much for a Fear is a Belief

, ,

and acts i n the direction of actualizin g itself ,

s om e tim e s .But a g ain as Kiplin g woul d say

, ,
“ ’
But that s another story
,
This phase of
.

“
the subject is a mi ghty subject in itself and the ,
”
half has not been told even by th e many who
have written Of it The writer intends to try
.

to remedy the deficiency i n his next book b o xy ,

ever.

“ ”
T hen , a ga in the Exciteme n t of Thou ght
, ,

in the minds of people may be transmitted or

c ommuni c ate d to the minds Of oth er s , and a
2 28
 T H O U G H T I N ACTIO N
s imi l a r vib r ation se t up under certain c ond i,

tions and subject to certain restraining in

,

flue n ce s just as in the case of the Particles of

—

S ubstances in a body or Mass of Substance .

And in many ways that will suggest themselves

,

to the reader who has mastered the contents of

the earlier chapters of this bo ok the phenomena ,

of D ynamic Tho ug ht in the case of the A toms ,

and Particles may be and are duplicated in the

, ,

c ase of Individual Minds of Men .

The reader will see readily that this theory

, ,

of Dynamic Thou ght and the facts noted in the

,

consideration thereof give an intelligent ex,

planation fo r th e respective phenomena of

Hyp n otism Mesmerism Sugg estion Thought
, , ,

tran sfe r ence Telepathy etc as well as Of Men

, ,
.
,

tal H ealing Ma gnetic Healing etc all of which

, ,
.
,
“
a r e m anfe station s of D ynamic Thought .

N ot o nly do we se e as Prentice Mulford said

, ,
“ ”
that Thou ghts are Things b ut we may se e ,
“ ”
j u s t w hy the y are Thin g s A n d we may s ee .

an d un derstand the laws of their productio n

and ope r ation This theory of D ynamic

.

Thought will throw li ght into many dark co r

“ ”
n ers and make plain many ha r d sayi ngs
,

that have perplexed y ou in the past The wr iter .

believes that it g ives u s the ke y to ma ny of the

great Riddles of Life .

This th e ory has c om e to sta y It is no .

22 9
 M
DYN A I C THO U GHT
“ ”
ephemeral thin g doomed to die a borning
,
-
.

It will be taken up by others and polished and ,

“ ” —
added to and s haped and decorated
, , bu t
the fundamental principles will stand the stress
Of Tinie and Men O f this the writer fee l s
.

assured . It may be laughed at at first not only ,

“ ”
by the ma n on the street but also by the ,

scientists But it will outlive this and in time

.
,

will come to its own perhaps lon g after the

—

writer and the bo ok have been fo r g otten .

“
This must be so fo r the idea of Dynamic
—
”
Thou ght underlies the entire Universe and is ,

the cause Of all phenomena Not only is all that .

we see as Life and Mind and Substance illustra

,

t ions Of the Law but even that which lies back

,

Of thes e things must evidence the same Law .

Is it tO O daring a conception to hazard the

thought that perhaps the Universe itself is the
r e sul t of the D y n am ic T h oug h t of The Infin ite ?

Oh D yn amic Thought we see i n thee the in

, ,

strument by which all Form and Shape are

created chan ged and d estroyed w e see in thee
,
—

the so u rce Of all Energy Force and Motion ,

w e see thee Always pres e nt and Everywhere

—

—p r e sent an d always in Action

, Verily thou .
,

art Life in Action Tho u art the embodiment

.

Of Action and Motion of which ! ittel hath said

,
“
Wherever our eyes dwel l on the Universe
whi th er soev er we are c arri e d in th e fligh t Of
2 30
 TH O UGHT I N A CT I O N
thought everywhere we find Motio n
,
S uns .
,

planets worlds bodies atoms and particles

, , , , ,

move an d act at thy bidding Amidst all the

,
.

chan g e o f Substance amon g the play of Force s

—

—and among and amidst all that results the re

from the r e art thou unchanged and constant

—
, , .

As thou gh fresh from the hand of The Infin ite ,

thou hast main tained thy vi go r and strength ,

and power throu ghout the aeons Of Time An d

,
.
,

likewise Space has no terrors for thee for tho u

, ,

hath mastered it Thou art a symbol O f the .

Power of The In finite thou art Its message to

—

doubtin g Man !
Let us close this bo ok with the thought of the
Greatness of this Thin g that we call D ynamic
Thought which g reat as it is is but as the
—
, ,

Shadow O f the Absolute Power of The Infinite

O ne whi ch is the Causeless Cause and the
, ,

Causer of Causes And in thus parting com .

pany reader let us murmur the wo rds of the

, ,

G erman poet who has sun g ,

u a k f or r st ? S th n how f o o li sh is th y desir ;
“ D ost tho s e ee e e
th st e n yoke of mo t i o n ho ld s in ha rn s s th e who l e
e r e
U ni er s v e
N o w h er in th is a ge c a ns t th o u e er fi n d res t a nd n o pow er
.

e v
c a n d li v er th ee f om th e d oo m of A c t i v i t y
,
e r
“ R st i s n o t t o be fo und ei th r i n h e a en o r o n e a r th
.

e v an d e
f r o m de ath a nd dyin g b e ak fo r th n e w gr o w th — n w
,
r e
bir th
,

A ll th e li f e of N at ure i s an o c a n of A c t i v i t y ; fo ll owi n g
.

e
o n h er f o otst ps w i tho u t ce a sin g tho u mus t m a rc h fo r
e

wa rd w i th t h w h ole
, ,
e
E v en th e d a k po ta l of d ath gi v es th ee n o r
.

r r e e
of thy cofli n w ill s pri n g b loss o ms of
FI N IS .
 HE de s ire of ev ery re a der is to get h ot
f r o m h is p l l that a p o gres s i v w ri t er
,
e n, a r e
has t o y R a d rs f thi bo o k w ill be sa e e O s
in t st d i n kn o wing th t M r Willi a m
.
‘

e re e a
Wa l k r At kin s on i s on th e regul a r di
.

t o i l s t ff of T H E SEG NO GRAM
e e
r a a nd that
a
t h e c h oice st f hi s I Ca and I Will
,
“ ” n
O
p re a c h men ts a re app e a ring in e a h i ss u of that m ag c e
a ne
T HE SEGNOG RAM
zi
i s a mon thly m g a ine f or Sue
.

a z
c ss— Th o ught Th ink s d R de s It has o
e er an ea r ne
mi ss i o n to fi l th e u p b uilding th bett ermen t of
.

l — — e
m a n It h no t im t o q as l w i th a ny c d s c t e u ar r e r ee e
d o t rin o beli f Th L w o f Lo v e i s i ts o n t ol ling
.
, ,
c e r e e a c r

it has none o t h r ad i t i s to b
.

in fl u e—
e nc T e r. O e e
imbu d wi th i ts h igh t h ings It i s a S ucce ss Ma ga
e e ac
ine th t t a h s h ow t o w i S u ss wi tho t p a h
.

z a e c e n cce u re c
ing a b o ut i t It b li v s in doing th ing s b aus in e e e ec e
d o ing th ings we wi S u ss
.
,
n cc e
D you d s i t o com in wi th us ? D O you w a n t
.

O e re e
to j oin ou i l of tho usa nd s o f S u ss a d s ?
r c rc e cce re er
D o y o u w a n t to g t th a m o f S u ss— th o ght ?
M
e e cr e cce u
If s o you m ust no t l g b h ind ! p t o th f o n t a e ee e r
by k p ing in t o u h w i t h A t kin on a nd h i s o
.

ee c r. s c
w o k rs M e ss rs A V ic t or Segno a nd H M W a lk r
r e e
Th p i of th m g ine i 50 c n ts a y a r fi e
. . . .
, .

e r ce e a az s e e v

n ts th c opy Wri t fo r s a mp le Cop y i f you n v er

,
ce e e e
ha e see n i t
.

v .

A D D R ESS

Los ANGELES, CAL;

 RETURNTO the i
c rc ul a t on i d e sk of a ny
Uni v e rsi ty of C a l i forni a Li b ra ry
or to the
NO RTHERN REG IO NAL L IBRARY FAC IL ITY
Bl d g 4 00 Ri c h m ond Fi e l d Stati on
. ,

Uni v e rsi ty of C a l i forni a

Ri c h m ond CA 94 804 4 698

M
-
,

ALLBO O ! S AY BEREC ALL ED AFTER 7 DAYS

2 m onth l oa ns m a y b e
-
re ne we d by i
c a l l ng

( 5 10) 64 2 6 7 53 -

l ye a r l oa ns m a y b e
—
re c h a rg e d b y b ri ng i ng
b ooks to NRLF
Re wa l s a nd re c ha rg e s m a y b e m a d e 4
ne
d a ys p ri or to d ue d ate

M
.

DUEAS STA PED BELO W

N
OV2 9 2000

U C BER! ELEY
. .